<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=WikiSysop</id>
	<title>PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=WikiSysop"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/WikiSysop"/>
	<updated>2026-11-06T02:22:22Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.46.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Guy_Alon&amp;diff=12508</id>
		<title>User talk:Guy Alon</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Guy_Alon&amp;diff=12508"/>
		<updated>2017-02-07T15:34:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 09:34, 7 February 2017 (CST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Guy_Alon&amp;diff=12507</id>
		<title>User:Guy Alon</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Guy_Alon&amp;diff=12507"/>
		<updated>2017-02-07T15:34:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Coordinates the City&#039;s street lighting program. Reviews work schedules and design work on City street light projects.&lt;br /&gt;
May assist with review or coordination of developer funded street light projects. Coordinates bid process, plan review,&lt;br /&gt;
and inspections. Visits project site and discusses problems with inspectors, contractors, and designers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates planning and design of traffic signal installation and improvement projects. Assists with scheduling and&lt;br /&gt;
assigning City signal projects to staff, reviews City staff&#039;s and consulting engineer&#039;s plans, monitors bid process, visits&lt;br /&gt;
project site and monitors construction inspections&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Serves as project manager for assigned projects and supervises project team members in the performance of their&lt;br /&gt;
duties to ensure that all design and construction is in compliance with applicable City and other governmental&lt;br /&gt;
requirements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Develops and implements work plans for operational, technical and management projects. Develops project scope&lt;br /&gt;
and objectives. Develops schedules, project estimates, resource plans and status reports. Conducts project tracking&lt;br /&gt;
and analysis&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Zach&amp;diff=12506</id>
		<title>User talk:Zach</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Zach&amp;diff=12506"/>
		<updated>2017-02-07T15:33:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 09:33, 7 February 2017 (CST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Zach&amp;diff=12505</id>
		<title>User:Zach</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Zach&amp;diff=12505"/>
		<updated>2017-02-07T15:33:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;I am a Senior Civil Engineer and project manager for the City of Overland Park in the Public Works Department/Engineering-CIP Group. I obtained my Bachelor’s degree in Civil Engineering from Michigan State University and a Master’s degree also in Civil Engineering from the University of Missouri – Kansas City. I have lived in the Kansas City area since 2011.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Brian_Geiger&amp;diff=10927</id>
		<title>User talk:Brian Geiger</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Brian_Geiger&amp;diff=10927"/>
		<updated>2015-11-24T22:07:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 16:07, 24 November 2015 (CST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Brian_Geiger&amp;diff=10926</id>
		<title>User:Brian Geiger</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Brian_Geiger&amp;diff=10926"/>
		<updated>2015-11-24T22:07:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Traffic Engineer&lt;br /&gt;
Works under Bruce Wacker.  Talk to him if you have questions.&lt;br /&gt;
Formerly with a consultant for 6.5 years before switching.&lt;br /&gt;
Copying and pasting at Mike Ross&#039;s request to get 50 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
Copying and pasting at Mike Ross&#039;s request to get 50 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
Copying and pasting at Mike Ross&#039;s request to get 50 characters.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Pugsly777&amp;diff=10925</id>
		<title>User talk:Pugsly777</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Pugsly777&amp;diff=10925"/>
		<updated>2015-11-24T20:32:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[https://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Special:MyLanguage/Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 14:32, 24 November 2015 (CST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Pugsly777&amp;diff=10924</id>
		<title>User:Pugsly777</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Pugsly777&amp;diff=10924"/>
		<updated>2015-11-24T20:32:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith. Testing by Keith.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Yield_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9063</id>
		<title>Yield Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Yield_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9063"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:29:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Yield” Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, 12.04.032, 12.04.057 – 12.04.059, 12.04.080], and {{Resolution_4037}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
Engineering judgment should be used to establish intersection control. The following factors should be considered:&lt;br /&gt;
:A. Vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. Number and angle of approaches;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Approach speeds;&lt;br /&gt;
:D. Sight distance available on each approach; and&lt;br /&gt;
:E. Reported crash experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Yield” or “Stop” signs should be used at an intersection if one or more of the following conditions exist:&lt;br /&gt;
:A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. A street entering a designated through highway or street; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
:C. An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the use of “Yield” or “Stop” signs should be considered at the intersection of two minor streets or local roads where the intersection has more than three approaches and where one or more of the following conditions exist:&lt;br /&gt;
:A. The combined vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from all approaches averages more than 2,000 units per day;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. The ability to see conflicting traffic on an approach is not sufficient to allow a road user to stop or yield in compliance with the normal right-of-way rule if such stopping or yielding is necessary; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Crash records indicate that five or more crashes that involve the failure to yield the right-of-way at the intersection under the normal right-of-way rule have been reported within a 3-year period, or that three or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the decision has been made to control an intersection, the decision regarding the appropriate roadway to control should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the roadway carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be controlled.&lt;br /&gt;
A “Yield” or “Stop” sign should not be installed on the higher volume roadway unless justified by an engineering study. The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate roadway upon which to install a “Yield” or “Stop” sign where two roadways with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect:&lt;br /&gt;
:A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; and&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:R1-2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
“Yield” (R1-2) signs assign right-of-way to traffic on certain approaches to an intersection. Vehicles controlled by a “Yield” sign need to slow down to a speed that is reasonable for the existing conditions or stop when necessary to avoid interfering with conflicting traffic.  “Yield” signs may be installed:&lt;br /&gt;
#On the approaches to a through street or highway where conditions are such that a full stop is not always required.&lt;br /&gt;
#For a channelized turn lane that is separated from the adjacent travel lanes by an island, even if the adjacent lanes at the intersection are controlled by a traffic control signal or by a “Stop” sign.&lt;br /&gt;
#An intersection where a special problem exists and where engineering judgment indicates the problem to be susceptible to correction by the use of the “Yield” sign.&lt;br /&gt;
#Facing the entering roadway for a merge-type movement if engineering judgment indicates that control is needed because acceleration geometry and/or sight distance is not adequate for merging traffic operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Yield” sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies.  The “Yield” sign shall be located as close as practical to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.  Except at roundabouts, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the “Yield” sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a multi-lane roundabout approach, an additional “Yield” sign should be placed on the left-hand side of the approach. If a raised splitter island is available on the left-hand side of a single lane roundabout approach, an additional “Yield” sign may be placed on the left-hand side of the approach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Yield” lines, that are used to supplement a “Yield” sign, should be located at the point behind which vehicles are required to yield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The reviewer should observe the intersection sight distance triangle to determine if adequate sight distance cannot be achieved according to the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/collection_detail.aspx?ID=110 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets], latest edition. “Yield” signs will be installed at locations as determined by the City Traffic Engineer to control traffic. A field investigation is required to determine if a “Yield” sign is to be installed at various types of intersections as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===T-Intersections:===&lt;br /&gt;
#If intersection sight distance requirements for the minor street at residential / residential street “T”–intersections with no control are not met based on [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Controlled vs Uncontrolled.pdf|Case A (No Control, but Allowing Vehicles to Adjust Speed)]], some type of control should be considered. The sight distance requirements are based on the guidelines indicated in the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/collection_detail.aspx?ID=110 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets], latest edition.  &lt;br /&gt;
#If the intersection sight distance triangle provides adequate sight distance for a yield condition for left or right turns, a “Yield” sign should be considered.  According to these criteria, whenever the sight triangle is limited based on yield conditions for left or right turns, a “Stop” sign should be considered. Refer to the [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control.pdf|Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control]] for reviewing intersection sight distance for standard 28&#039; back to back residential streets. (Also see [[Stop Sign Design Guidelines]] Regarding the Installation of &amp;quot;Stop Signs”)&lt;br /&gt;
#When not called for based on sight distance requirement, a “Yield” sign may be posted at residential T-intersections (3-leg) to assign right-of-way.   The leg (or legs) to be signed will be determined by engineering judgment based on driver expectations.  A typical situation where assignment of ROW is needed is a situation where the major street is the leg of the T-intersection.  An example of such a situation is the intersection of 164th and Ash.  Ash, which is the connecting street between the neighborhood and the collector street, intersects at a “T” with 164th Street.  Being identified as the major street a driver on Ash may assume the right-of-way at 164th Street.  However, as Ash is the leg of the T-intersection, a driver on 164th may also assume the right-of-way.  Thus the need to assign right-of-way arises.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Roundabouts:===&lt;br /&gt;
#“Yield” signs will only be installed on the right hand side of the approach lanes and not on the left hand side in the splitter island at single lane roundabouts.&lt;br /&gt;
#At multi-lane roundabouts, an additional “Yield” sign will be installed in the splitter island on the left hand side of the approach.&lt;br /&gt;
#See [[Roundabout Sign Design Guidelines]] for additional information and requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===At Free-Flow Right Turn Lanes:===&lt;br /&gt;
#“Yield” signs will be installed at locations where free-flow right turn lanes merge onto another street, e.g. at ramp terminals coming off the interstate or other highway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Conditions where “Yield” signs will not be installed:===&lt;br /&gt;
#When not warranted unless otherwise directed by Council action or as determined by the City Traffic Engineer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Typically, “Yield” signs will not be installed at any intersection other than T-intersections, roundabouts, or at locations of free-flow right turn lanes.&lt;br /&gt;
#If not meeting any of the above criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sign Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The standard size of the “Yield” (R1-2) sign will be 36” x 36” x 36” when facing traffic on a single lane approach and 48” x 48” x 48” when facing traffic on a multi-lane approach.  It shall be a downward-pointing equilateral triangle with a wide red border and the legend YIELD in red on a white retro-reflectorized background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.32 Duties of City Traffic Engineer&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
:a) The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the installation and proper timing and maintenance of traffic control devices; conduct engineering analysis of traffic accidents and devise remedial measures; conduct engineering investigations of traffic conditions; plan the operation of traffic on the streets and highways of this City; cooperate with other City officials in the development of ways and means to improve traffic conditions; and carry out the additional powers and duties imposed by ordinances of this City.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:b) The City Traffic Engineer, the Assistant City Traffic Engineer, or the Director of Public Works shall place, maintain, change, and remove traffic control signs, signals, and devices, when and as required under the traffic ordinances of this City to make effective and carry out the provisions of said ordinances, and may place, maintain, change and remove such additional traffic control devices as he may deem necessary to regulate traffic or to warn or guide traffic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: Ord. TC-1260,C §1,86;TC-1260 §31,84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARTICLE X. RIGHT-OF-WAY ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.057 Vehicles Approaching or Entering Intersection.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:a) When two vehicles approach or enter an intersection from different highways at approximately the same time, the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the vehicle on the right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:b) The right-of-way rule declared in subsection (a) is modified at through highways and otherwise as hereinafter stated in this ordinance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1526; Ord. TC-1260PP &#039;3, 98; TC-1260 &#039;56, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.058 Vehicle Turning Left.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The driver of a vehicle intending to turn to the left within an intersection or into any alley, private road or driveway shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle approaching from the opposite direction which is within the intersection or so close thereto as to constitute an immediate hazard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1527; Ord. TC-1260 &#039;57, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.59 Stop Signs and Yield Signs.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:a) Preferential right-of-way may be indicated by stop signs or yield signs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:b) Except when directed to proceed by a police officer, every driver of a vehicle approaching a stop sign shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it.  After having stopped, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:c) The driver of a vehicle approaching a yield sign shall in obedience to such sign slow down to a speed reasonable for the existing conditions and if required for safety to stop, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it.  After slowing or stopping, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways. Such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk.  If a driver is involved in a collision with a vehicle in the intersection or junction of roadways or with a pedestrian in an adjacent crosswalk, after driving past a yield sign without stopping, such collision shall be deemed prima facie evidence of the driver&#039;s failure to yield right-of-way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1528; Ord. TC-1260, KK §6, 95; TC-1260 §58, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.060 Vehicle Entering Roadway.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The driver of a vehicle about to enter or cross a roadway from any place other than another roadway shall yield the right-of-way to all vehicles approaching on the roadway to be entered or crossed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1529; Ord. TC-1260 §59, 84) See: 12.04.002 &amp;amp; 12.04.080&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.080 Emerging from Alley or Private Driveway or Building.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The driver of a vehicle emerging from an alley, building, private road or driveway within a&lt;br /&gt;
business or residence district shall stop such vehicle immediately prior to driving onto a sidewalk or onto the sidewalk area extending across such alley, building entrance, road or driveway, or in the event there is no sidewalk area, shall stop at the point nearest the street to be entered where the driver has a view of approaching traffic thereon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1555; Ord. TC-1260 &#039;79, 84)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Speed_Limit_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9062</id>
		<title>Speed Limit Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Speed_Limit_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9062"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:27:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Speed Limit” (R2-1) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Speed Limit” (R2-1) signs shall display the speed limit as establish by law, ordinance, regulation, or as adopted by the authorized agency based on an engineering study.  The speed limits displayed shall be in multiples of 5 mph.  The speed posted should be the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing traffic rounded up to the nearest 5 mph increment. [[Image:R2-1.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Speed Limit” (R2-1) signs, indicating speed limits for which posting is required by law, shall be located at the points of change from one speed limit to another. At the downstream end of the section to which a speed limit applies, a “Speed Limit” sign showing the next speed limit shall be installed. Additional “Speed Limit” signs shall be installed beyond major intersections and at other locations where it is necessary to remind road users of the speed limit that is applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
A field investigation is required to determine if a “Speed Limit” sign is to be installed. [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.033]“Speed Limitations; Restrictions” establishes appropriate speeds on particular streets.  The general guidelines are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;500px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Street Classification&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Posted Speed Limit&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Divided Thoroughfare&lt;br /&gt;
|45 mph with limited access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Divided Thoroughfare&lt;br /&gt;
|35 mph with minimal access control&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Undivided Thoroughfare&lt;br /&gt;
|35 mph &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Collector Streets (36’ back to back)&lt;br /&gt;
|30 mph&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Collector Streets (&amp;lt; 36’ back to back)&lt;br /&gt;
|25 mph or 30 mph&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Residential Streets&lt;br /&gt;
|25 mph unless narrow or substandard curves&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Downtown Areas&lt;br /&gt;
|20 mph&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Residential Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
It is not the intent to install “Speed Limit” signs on residential streets within sub-divisions where the primary traffic is generated from citizens that reside within.  “Speed Limit” signs are generally installed on residential streets at locations where traffic would be entering from a street that has a higher posted speed limit.  The intent is to provide the motorist information in regard to an impending change in posted speed, which may otherwise be difficult to perceive.  “Speed Limit” signs are not normally installed on cul-de-sac streets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Collector Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
“Speed Limit” signs are generally installed on collector streets at locations where traffic would be entering from a street that has a higher posted speed limit and at intervals not to exceed approximately 1/2-mile intervals.  Additional signs may be installed by request if deemed necessary for excessive speeding violations in order to support better enforcement.  Changes in speed limit can be achieved upon a spot speed study indicating the 85th percentile speed and as approved by the City Traffic Engineer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Thoroughfare Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
“Speed Limit” signs are generally installed downstream of thoroughfare-thoroughfare intersections, and downstream of collector street intersections or at approximately the ½ mile points.  Additional signs may be installed by request if deemed necessary for excessive speeding violations in order to support better enforcement.  Changes in speed limit can be achieved upon a spot speed study indicating the 85th percentile speed and as approved by the City Traffic Engineer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exceptions to any of the above requirements may be made if sufficient evidence exists for speeding as gathered by using the “stealthstat” monitoring equipment.  The data should be gathered over a 48-hour minimum time period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon investigation of a citizen request, if it is determined that the area is adequately signed according to this suggested guideline, the appropriate location information is forwarded to the Overland Park Police Department for enforcement.  If enforcement is not successful in reducing the speeds of the traveling motorist, the location will be reviewed to determine if it meets the warrants for traffic calming measures as established in the Traffic Calming Policy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Speed Limit” (R2-1) sign shall have black letters and border, on a retro-reflectorized white background and shall be 24” x 30” on conventional roadways with single lane approaches and on multi-lane conventional roadways with speeds less than or equal to 35 mph.  On multi-lane conventional roadways with speeds greater than 35 mph, the sign shall be 30”x36”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.033 Speed Limitations; Restrictions.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(a) No person shall drive a vehicle on a highway at a speed greater than is reasonable and prudent under the conditions and having regard to the actual hazards then existing. Consistent with the foregoing, every person shall drive at a safe and appropriate speed when approaching and crossing an intersection or railroad grade crossing, when approaching and going around a curve, when approaching a hill crest, when traveling upon any narrow or winding roadway, and when special hazards exist with respect to pedestrians or other traffic or by reason of weather or highway conditions. In every event speed shall be so controlled as may be necessary to avoid colliding with any person, fixed object, vehicle, or other conveyance lawfully on or entering the highway or lawfully on private or public property.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(b) As used in this Section, “daytime” means from 30 minutes before sunrise to 30 minutes after sunset; and “nighttime” means any other hour.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(c) Except when a special hazard exists that requires lower speed for compliance with paragraph (a) of this Section, the limits specified in this Section or established as hereinafter authorized shall be maximum lawful speeds, and no person shall operate a vehicle at a speed in excess of such maximum limits:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(1) All vehicles 20 miles per hour in any business district.&lt;br /&gt;
:(2) All vehicles 25 miles per hour in any residence district except where posted otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
:(3) All vehicles 20 miles per hour in any park under the jurisdiction of this City.&lt;br /&gt;
:(4) Unless posted otherwise, all vehicles 30 miles per hour on streets or highways on which an engineering and traffic investigation has been conducted in an urban district.&lt;br /&gt;
:(5) Unless posted otherwise, all vehicles 55 miles per hour on arterial streets on which an engineering and traffic investigation has been conducted.&lt;br /&gt;
:(6) All vehicles on any separated multilane highway, as designated and posted by the Secretary of Transportation, 75 miles per hour.&lt;br /&gt;
:(7) All vehicles 65 miles per hour in all other locations unless posted otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
(d) The maximum speed limit upon streets or portions of streets abutting school property or adjacent to school crosswalks in those areas designated as school zones shall be the speed limit posted on appropriately erected signs giving notice of the speed limit in said school zones. The maximum speed to be posted within each school zone shall be determined by the City Traffic Engineer provided the speed limit shall not be less than 20 miles per hour. Maximum speed limits within school zones shall be effective and subject to enforcement by law enforcement officers during those time periods set forth on appropriately erected signs giving notice of the effective hours of enforcement or during those times a flashing yellow beacon is in operation with appropriately erected signs indicating the school zone speed limits are enforced during the times the flashing yellow beacon is in operation. The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the times of enforcement for school zones within the City, provided such speed limits shall apply only during the hours in which students are normally en route to or from school.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(e) Whenever the City Traffic Engineer shall determine upon the basis of an engineering and traffic investigation that any speed limit hereinbefore set forth is greater or less than is reasonable or safe under the conditions found to exist upon any part of a street which said City Traffic Engineer shall determine and declare a reasonable and safe speed limit thereon which shall be effective at all times or during the daytime or nighttime or at such other times as may be determined when appropriate signs giving notice thereof are erected on such street, pursuant to K.S.A. 8-1560 and K.S.A. 8-2002.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: Ord. TC-1260,RRR §9, 2011; TC-1260,ZZ §1, 2003; TC-1260,MM §6, 96; TC-1260,R §1, 89; TC-1260 §32, 84) See: 12.04.002 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.034 Minimum Speed Regulation.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(a) No person shall drive a motor vehicle at such a slow speed as to impede the normal and reasonable movement of traffic except when reduced speed is necessary for safe operation or in compliance with law.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(b) Whenever the governing body determines on the basis of an engineering and traffic investigation that slow speeds on any highway or part of a highway consistently impede the normal and reasonable movement of traffic, the governing body may determine and declare a minimum speed limit below which no person shall drive a vehicle except when necessary for safe operation or in compliance with law, and that limit shall be effective when posted upon appropriate fixed or variable signs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1561; Ord. TC-1260 §33, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.035 Special Speed Limitation on Motor-Driven Cycle.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
No person shall operate any motor-driven cycle at any time mentioned in 12.04.144 at a speed greater than 35 miles per hour unless such motor-driven cycle is equipped with a head lamp or lamps which are adequate to reveal a person or vehicle at a distance of 300 feet ahead. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1562; Ord. TC-1260 §34, 84) See: 12.04.182 &amp;amp; 12.04.187&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.036 Charging Speed Violations.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In every charge of violation of any speed regulation in this Article, except violation of O.P.M.C. 12-.04.033(a), the complaint, also the summons or notice to appear, shall specify the speed at which the defendant is alleged to have driven, also the speed limit applicable within the district or at the location.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: Ord. TC-1260,KKK §3, 2007; K.S.A.8-1564; Ord. TC-1260 §35, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.037 Racing on Highways; &amp;quot;Drag Race&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Racing&amp;quot; Defined.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(a) No person shall drive any vehicle in any race, speed competition or contest, drag race or acceleration contest, test of physical endurance, or for the purpose of making a record, and no person shall in any manner participate in any such race, competition, contest, test or exhibition.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(b) No person shall operate any motor vehicle in a manner that unnecessarily causes an exhibition of speed or acceleration.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(c) &amp;quot;Drag race&amp;quot; is defined as the operation of two or more vehicles from a point side by side at accelerating speeds in a competitive attempt to out-distance each other, or the operation of one or more vehicles over a common selected course from the same point to the same point, for the purpose of comparing the relative speeds or power of acceleration of such vehicle or vehicles within a certain distance or time limit.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(d) &amp;quot;Racing&amp;quot; is defined as the use of one or more vehicles in an attempt to out-gain, outdistance or prevent another vehicle from passing to arrive at a given destination ahead of another vehicle or vehicles, or to test the physical stamina or endurance of drivers over long distance driving routes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(e) Exhibition of speed or acceleration is defined as the operation of a motor vehicle in such a manner that causes an unnecessary rapid acceleration of the vehicle as evidenced by any or all of the following physical manifestations of acceleration:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:(1) Unnecessary tire squeal at the time of acceleration;&lt;br /&gt;
:(2) Observation of smoke from tires of the vehicle at the time of acceleration;&lt;br /&gt;
:(3) Observation of the tires of the vehicle losing traction with the road surface;&lt;br /&gt;
:(4) Observation of the front part of the vehicle being elevated at the time of acceleration;&lt;br /&gt;
:(5) Observation of the vehicle moving laterally at the time of acceleration;&lt;br /&gt;
:(6) Loud engine noise at the time of acceleration;&lt;br /&gt;
:(7) Observation of dirt and other road surface materials being thrown by the tires of the vehicle at the time of acceleration.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: Ord. TC-1260,M §1, 89; KSA 8-1565; Ord. TC-1260 §36, 84) See: 12.04.002&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=School_Zone_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9061</id>
		<title>School Zone Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=School_Zone_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9061"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:26:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “School Zone” Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===School Sign (S1-1) and Plaques===&lt;br /&gt;
The School (S1-1) sign has the following four applications:[[Image:S1-1 Signs &amp;amp; S4-3P &amp;amp; S4-7P plaques.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
:A. School Area - the S1-1 sign can be used to warn road users that they are approaching a school area that might include school buildings or grounds, a school crossing, or school related activity adjacent to the highway.&lt;br /&gt;
:B. School Zone - the S1-1 sign can be used to identify the location of the beginning of a designated school zone.&lt;br /&gt;
:C. School Advance Crossing - if combined with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque or an XX FEET (W16-2P or W16-2aP) plaque to comprise the School Advance Crossing assembly, the S1-1 sign can be used to warn road users that they are approaching a crossing where schoolchildren cross the roadway.&lt;br /&gt;
:D. School Crossing - if combined with a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque to comprise the School Crossing assembly, the S1-1 sign can be used to warn approaching road users of the location of a crossing where schoolchildren cross the roadway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===School Zone Sign (S1-1) and Plaques (S4-3P, S4-7P) and END SCHOOL ZONE Sign (S5-2)===&lt;br /&gt;
If a school zone has been designated under State or local statute, a School (S1-1) sign shall be installed to identify the beginning point(s) of the designated school zone.[[Image:S5-2.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A School Zone (S1-1) sign may be supplemented with a SCHOOL (S4-3P) plaque.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A School Zone (S1-1) sign may be supplemented with an ALL YEAR (S4-7P) plaque if the school operates on a 12-month schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The downstream end of a designated school zone may be identified with an END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a school zone is located on a cross street in close proximity to the intersection, a School Zone (S1-1) sign with a supplemental arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plaque may be installed on each approach of the street or highway to warn road users making a turn onto the cross street that they will encounter a school zone soon after making the turn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===School Advance Crossing Assembly ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:School Advance Crossing Assembly.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
The School Advance Crossing assembly shall consist of a School (S1-1) sign supplemented with an AHEAD (W16-9P) plaque or an XX FEET (W16-2P or W16-2aP) plaque.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A School Advance Crossing assembly shall be used in advance of the first School Crossing assembly that is encountered in each direction as traffic approaches a school crosswalk, except it may be omitted where a School Zone (S1-1) sign is installed to identify the beginning of a school zone in advance of the School Crossing assembly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===School Crossing Assembly===&lt;br /&gt;
If used, the School Crossing assembly shall be installed at the school crossing or as close to it as possible, and shall consist of a School (S1-1) sign supplemented with a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque to show the location of the crossing.  The School Crossing assembly shall not be used at crossings other than those adjacent to schools and those on established school pedestrian routes.  The School Crossing assembly shall not be installed on approaches controlled by a “Stop” or “Yield” sign.[[Image:School Crossing Assembly.JPG|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===School Speed Limit Assembly (S4-1P, S4-2P, S4-3P, S4-4P, S4-6P, S5-1) and END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT Sign (S5-3)===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:School Speed Limit Sign.JPG|right]][[Image:School Speed Limit Assembly.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
A School Speed Limit assembly or a School Speed Limit (S5-1) sign shall be used to indicate the speed limit where a reduced school speed limit zone has been established based upon an engineering study or where a reduced school speed limit is specified for such areas by statute. The School Speed Limit assembly or School Speed Limit sign shall be placed at or as near as practical to the point where the reduced school speed limit zone begins. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a reduced school speed limit zone has been established, a School (S1-1) sign shall be installed in advance of the first School Speed Limit sign assembly or S5-1 sign that is encountered in each direction as traffic approaches the reduced school speed limit zone according to the guidelines for advance placement of warning signs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The downstream end of an authorized and posted reduced school speed limit zone shall be identified with an END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign.  However, if a reduced school speed limit zone ends at the same point as a higher fines zone, an END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign may be used instead of a combination of an END HIGHER FINES ZONE (R2-11) sign and an END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:End School Zone Speed Limit Signs.JPG|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
A standard Speed Limit sign showing the speed limit for the section of highway that is downstream from the authorized and posted reduced school speed limit zone may be mounted on the same post above the END SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT (S5-3) sign or the END SCHOOL ZONE (S5-2) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beginning point of a reduced school speed limit zone should be at least 200 feet in advance of the school grounds, a school crossing, or other school related activities; however, this 200-foot distance should be increased if the reduced school speed limit is 30 mph or higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The School Speed Limit assembly shall consist of a top plaque (S4-3P) with the legend SCHOOL, a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign, and a bottom plaque (S4-1P, S4-2P, S4-4P, or S4-6P) indicating the specific periods of the day and/or days of the week that the special school speed limit is in effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Speed Limit Sign Beacon also may be used, with a WHEN FLASHING legend, to identify the periods that the school speed limit is in effect&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reduced School Speed Limit Ahead Sign (S4-5, S4-5a)===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Reduced School Speed Limit Ahead Signs.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
A Reduced School Speed Limit Ahead (S4-5, S4-5a) sign should be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more than 10 mph, or where engineering judgment indicates that advance notice would be appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If used, the Reduced School Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be followed by a School Speed Limit sign or a School Speed Limit assembly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The speed limit displayed on the Reduced School Speed Limit Ahead sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent School Speed Limit sign or School Speed Limit assembly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Roundabout_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9060</id>
		<title>Roundabout Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Roundabout_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9060"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:26:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of Signs at Roundabouts&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition, [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.], [[Yield Sign Design Guidelines]], [[Street Name Sign Design Guidelines]], [[Object Marker Sign Design Guidelines]], [[Keep Right Sign Design Guidelines]] and [[School Zone Sign Design Guidelines]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===“Yield” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:R1-2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
A “Yield” (R1-2) sign shall be used to assign right-of-way at the entrance to a roundabout. “Yield” signs at roundabouts shall be used to control the approach roadways and shall not be used to control the circulatory roadway.  Other than for all of the approaches to a roundabout, “Yield” signs shall not be placed on all of the approaches to an intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Roundabout Directional Arrow” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
Where the central island of a roundabout allows for the installation of signs, “Roundabout Directional Arrow” (R6-4 or R6-4a) signs should be used in the central island to direct traffic counter-clockwise around the central island.  “Roundabout Directional Arrow” signs shall be used only at roundabouts and other circular intersections.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:R6-4 &amp;amp; R6-4a.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
When used on the central island of a roundabout, the mounting height of a “Roundabout Directional Arrow” sign should be at least 4 feet, measured vertically from the bottom of the sign to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way. More than one “Roundabout Directional Arrow” sign may be used facing high-speed approaches, facing approaches with limited visibility, or in other circumstances as determined by engineering judgment where increased sign visibility would be appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Roundabout Circulation” Plaque===&lt;br /&gt;
Where the central island of a roundabout does not provide a reasonable place to install a sign, “Roundabout Circulation” (R6-5P) plaques should be placed below the “Yield” signs on each approach.  At roundabouts where “Roundabout Directional Arrow” signs and/or “One Way” signs have been installed in the central island, “Roundabout Circulation” plaques may be placed below the “Yield” signs on approaches to roundabouts to supplement the central island signs.  The “Roundabout Circulation” plaque may be used at any type of circular intersection.[[Image:R6-5p.JPG|right]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Intersection Lane Use Control” Signs for Roundabouts===&lt;br /&gt;
“Intersection Lane Control” signs, if used, shall require road users in certain lanes to turn, shall permit turns from a lane where such turns would otherwise not be permitted, shall require a road user to stay in the same lane and proceed straight through an intersection, or shall indicate permitted movements from a lane.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At roundabouts, “Intersection Lane Control” (R3-5, R3-6, and R3-8 series) signs may display any of the arrow symbol options shown below.[[Image:Roundabout Lane Use.JPG|left]][[Image:R3-8 Roundabout.JPG|center]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sign shall indicate only the single vehicle movement that is required from the lane and shall be located in advance of the intersection, such as near the upstream end of the mandatory movement lane, and/or at the intersection where the regulation applies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Pedestrian Crossing” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:W11-2.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
“Pedestrian Crossing” (W11-2) signs may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected pedestrian entries into the roadway might occur or where shared use of the roadway by pedestrians might occur.  These conflicts may be relatively confined, or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.[[Image:W16-7p.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If a post-mounted sign is placed at the location of the crossing point where pedestrians might be crossing the roadway, a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7P) plaque shall be mounted below the sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“School Crossing” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[School Zone Sign Design Guidelines]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Circular Intersection Symbol” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:W2-6.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
“Circular Intersection Symbol” (W2-6) signs may be installed in advance of a circular intersection.  If an approach to a roundabout has a statutory or posted speed limit of 40 mph or higher, the “Circular Intersection Symbol” (W2-6) sign should be installed in advance of the circular intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Advisory Speed” Plaque===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:W13-1P.JPG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
The “Advisory Speed” (W13-1P) plaque may be used to supplement any warning sign to indicate the advisory speed for a condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Yield&amp;quot; Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Yield” (R1-2) signs should be installed on the right hand side of the intersection approach.  Yield signs are not required in the splitter islands on the left hand side of the approach except for multi-lane roundabouts.  For multi-lane roundabouts, an additional yield sign will also be installed in the splitter island on the left hand side of the approach. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Street Name&amp;quot; Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Street Name” (D3-1) signs should be installed above the yield signs located on the right hand side of the intersection approach and should consist of double sign blades for each street name mounted back to back.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Roundabout Directional Arrow&amp;quot; Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Roundabout Directional Arrow” (R6-4 or R6-4a) signs should be installed within the central island of the roundabout directly in front of the approach lane.  The sign should consist of two or three black chevrons on white background.  The R6-4 sign should be used for single lane roundabouts and the R6-4a sign should be used for two-lane roundabouts.&lt;br /&gt;
			 &lt;br /&gt;
Where the central island of a roundabout does not provide a reasonable place to install a sign, Roundabout Circulation (R6-5P) plaques should be placed below the yield signs on each approach.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Pedestrian Crossing&amp;quot; Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Pedestrian Crossing” (W11-2) signs should be installed as appropriate at crosswalks within the limits of a roundabout.  The decision to install these signs should be based on the expected volume of pedestrian traffic (minimum of 10 pedestrians per hour for any one hour of the day).  The signs should be installed both at the approach and departure points near the crosswalk location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“School Crossing” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“School Crossing” (S1-1) signs should be considered in conjunction with established City of Overland Park school crosswalk signing and pavement marking criteria. See [[School Zone Sign Design Guidelines]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Circular Intersection&amp;quot; Signs and &amp;quot;Speed Advisory&amp;quot; Plaques===&lt;br /&gt;
“Circular Intersection” (W2-6) signs with an “Advisory Speed” (W13-1) plaque should always be installed in advance of each approach to the roundabout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Lane Use Control&amp;quot; Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Lane Control Use” (R8-3 Series) signs should be installed in advance of all multi-lane roundabouts to indicate the allowable turning movements from each lane of the roundabout. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Signs that are Not Required to be Installed at Roundabouts===&lt;br /&gt;
“One-Way” (R6-1) signs shall not be installed within the central island of the roundabout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Type I Object Marker” (OM1-3) signs are not required to be installed on the approach or departure noses of splitter islands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Keep Right” (R4-7) signs are not required to be installed on the approach or departure noses of splitter islands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sign Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Yield&amp;quot; Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
The standard size of the “Yield” (R1-2) sign will be 36” x 36” x 36” when facing traffic on a single lane approach and 48” x 48” x 48” when facing traffic on a multi-lane approach.  It shall be a downward-pointing equilateral triangle with a wide red border and the legend YIELD in red on a white retro-reflectorized background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Roundabout Directional Arrow” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
The “Roundabout Directional Arrow” (R6-4) sign shall be a 30” x 24” horizontal rectangle with two black chevron symbols pointing to the right on a white retro-reflectorized background. The (R6-4a) sign shall be a 48” x 24” horizontal rectangle with three black chevron symbols pointing to the right on a white retro-reflectorized background.  No border shall be used on the “Roundabout Directional Arrow” signs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Roundabout Circulation” Plaque===&lt;br /&gt;
The “Roundabout Circulation” (R6-5P) plaque shall be a 30” x 30” sign with black circulating arrows and a black border on a white retro-reflectorized background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Intersection Lane Use Control” Signs for Roundabouts===&lt;br /&gt;
“Intersection Lane Use Control” (R3-8 Series) signs for roundabouts shall 30” high x variable width depending on the lane configuration.  It shall have a black legend and border on a white retro-reflectorized background. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Pedestrian Crossing” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Pedestrian Crossing (W11-2) signs shall be 30” x 30” on the approaches and exits at single lane roundabouts and 36” x 36” on the approaches and exits at double lane roundabouts.  The “Diagonal Arrow” (W16-7P) plaque shall be 24” x 12”.  Both signs shall have a black legend and border on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“School Crossing” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
See City Guidelines for the Installation of School Crossing signs. See [[School Zone Sign Design Guidelines]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Circular Intersection Symbol” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Circular Intersection Symbol” (W2-6) signs shall be 30” x 30” and shall have a black legend and border on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===“Advisory Speed” Plaque===&lt;br /&gt;
“Advisory Speed” (W13-1P) plaques shall be 18” x 18” and shall have a black legend and border on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===&amp;quot;Street Name&amp;quot; Sign===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Street Name Sign Design Guidelines]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Do_Not_Block_Intersection_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9059</id>
		<title>Do Not Block Intersection Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Do_Not_Block_Intersection_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9059"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:25:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Do Not Block Intersection” (R10-7) or “Do Not Block Driveway” Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Do Not Block Intersection” (R10-7) sign, by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), may be installed for avoidance of traffic obstructions. [[Image:R10-7.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Appropriate Sign Installation Locations:===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the major street at multi-way stop or signal controlled intersections where traffic queues tend to back up through the intersection from an adjacent downstream signal or stop controlled intersection.  (Example:  Southbound Antioch at 85th Street.  From the intersection of Antioch Road and Santa Fe Drive, southbound Antioch Road traffic backs up through the intersection of 85th Street and Antioch Road.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#On a major two-lane, undivided street at a non-controlled or stop or yield sign controlled intersection where traffic queues back up from a multi-way or signal controlled intersection.  (Example:  Westbound 87th Street at Mackey.  From the intersection of 87th Street and Antioch Road, westbound 87th Street traffic backs up through the intersection of 87th Street and Mackey.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inappropriate Sign Installation Locations:===&lt;br /&gt;
#On the major four-lane or six-lane, divided or undivided streets at a non-controlled or stop or yield controlled intersection where a traffic queue backs up from a multi-way or signal controlled intersection.  (Example:  Southbound Quivira Road at 105th Street.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#At any intersection where sight distance obstructions, either stationary or moving (vehicles) occur and would pose a problem for the side street vehicle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reasons for Not Installing Signs:===&lt;br /&gt;
The City of Overland Park does not make it a standard practice of installing “Do Not Block Intersection” signs on multi-lane streets for several reasons:&lt;br /&gt;
#The sign is difficult to enforce from a police standpoint.&lt;br /&gt;
#Traffic flow can stop quickly and leave following vehicles in the middle of an intersection unintentionally.  It is a greater safety issue to have the vehicle back up out of the intersection.&lt;br /&gt;
#The sign also provides a false sense of security to the side street driver.  Vehicles in the outside lane of the thoroughfare may stop short of the intersection to allow a driver to exit from the side street.  However, there is no guarantee that a vehicle in the inside lane will stop.  The stopped vehicle in the outside lane of the thoroughfare then becomes a sight distance obstruction to the side street vehicle, who may pull out across the thoroughfare lanes and become involved in a right angle accident.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City of Overland Park does not install “Do Not Block Driveway” signs for entrances onto a public street from a private driveway.  It is not a standard sign in the MUTCD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Do Not Block Intersection” (R10-7) sign shall have a black legend and border, on a retro-reflectorized white background and be 24” x 30” in size.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Preapproved_Materials_ESC&amp;diff=9058</id>
		<title>Preapproved Materials ESC</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Preapproved_Materials_ESC&amp;diff=9058"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:25:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Preapproved_Materials|&#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Preapproved Materials&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Hydro Seeding - Additives ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=[http://kcmetro.apwa.net/chapters/kcmetro/specs/APWA5100.pdf APWA]}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Hydro Seeding - Additives&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Terra Nova, Inc.||EarthGuard Fiber Matrix||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML HydroSeeding EarthGuard.pdf|EarthGuard Fiber Matrix]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Finn Corporation||Additive System||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML HydroSeeding Finn.pdf|Finn Additives]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Straw Mat ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=[[Media:KDOT 90m-0193-r03.pdf|KDOT 90M-193-R3]], [[Media:KDOT 90p-0193-r03.pdf|(90P-193-R3)]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
*This item is covered under the KDOT Materials List as [[Media:KDOT Pql-34-B.pdf|PQL-34B]].&lt;br /&gt;
**[[Image:KDOT Pql-34-B.pdf|PQL-34B]] was last updated on 03/01/2007.&lt;br /&gt;
*The list is extensive and can be found on KDOT’s website.&lt;br /&gt;
*List which straw mat on [[Media:KDOT Pql-34-B.pdf|PQL-34B]] is being submitted for this project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Silt Fence ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=[[Media:KDOT 90m-0177-r02.pdf|KDOT 90M-177-R2]],[[Media:KDOT 90p-0177-r02.pdf|(90P-177-R2)]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Silt Fence&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Willacoochee||1210 Silt Fence||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML SiltFence 1210.pdf|1210 Silt Fence]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Amoco Fabrics and Fibers Co.||ProPex 2130||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML SiltFence Propex.pdf|ProPex 2130]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mirafi||Silt Fence||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML SiltFence Mirafi.pdf|Mirafi Silt Fence]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mirafi||Envirofence||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML SiltFence Mirafi Envirofence.pdf|Mirafi Envirofence]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Construction Fabrics &amp;amp; Supply||CFS5009||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|4/28/2006||||[[Media:AML SiltFence ConFabric.pdf|CFS5009]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Open-Matrix Ditch Check ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=[http://kcmetro.apwa.net/chapters/kcmetro/specs/APWA5100.pdf APWA]}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Open-Matrix Ditch Check&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Nilex||GeoRidge||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML OpenMatrix GeoRidge.pdf|GeoRidge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sediment Retention Wattle ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=KDOT SP 90P-151-R13}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Sediment Retention Wattle&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| RH Dyck, Inc.||Earthsaver||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML Wattle EarthSaver.pdf|Earthsaver]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Greenfix America||Earthsaver||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML Wattle Greenfix.pdf|Earthsaver]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| King Fibre||FibreLog||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML Wattle Fibrelog.pdf|FibreLog]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Profile Products||Terra-Tubes||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML Wattle TerraTubes.pdf|Terra-Tubes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| American Excelsior||Curlex Sediment Log||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML Wattle Curlex.pdf|Curlex]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Triangular Silt Dikes (Foam Barriers) ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=[http://kcmetro.apwa.net/chapters/kcmetro/specs/APWA5100.pdf APWA]}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Triangular Silt Dikes (Foam Barriers)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Triangular Silt Dike||Triangular Silt Dike Edge Barrier||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML TriangularSiltDike EdgeBarrier.pdf|Edge Barrier]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Triangular Silt Dike||Triangular Silt Dike Barrier||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML TriangularSiltDike Dike.pdf|Silt Dike]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Gravel Bags ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=Overland Park Specification: Gravel Bag}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Gravel Bags&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Class&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sacramento Bags||Snake Bag ||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML GravelBag SnakeBag.pdf|Snake Bag]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sacramento Bags||Filter Bag||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||Filter Bag&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Sacramento Bags||Woven Polypropylene Sandbags||&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||Woven Sandbags&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inlet Protection ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Specification|SPEC=[http://kcmetro.apwa.net/chapters/kcmetro/specs/APWA5100.pdf APWA]}}&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ &#039;&#039;&#039;Inlet Protection&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Manufacturer&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Product Name or Number&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Approval Date&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Catalog Cut Links&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mirafi||True Dam&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML InletProtection TrueDam.pdf|True Dam]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Silt-Saver, Inc.||SS-300 Curb Inlet Filter&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML InletProtection SiltSaver.pdf|SS-300]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ACF Environmental||GutterBuddy&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML InletProtection GutterBuddy.pdf|GutterBuddy]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ACF Environmental||FiltR Fence&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|12/15/2005||||[[Media:AML InletProtection FiltRFence.pdf|FiltR Fence]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preapproved_Materials|&#039;&#039;&#039;Return to Preapproved Materials&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Preapproved Materials]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=No_U-Turn_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9057</id>
		<title>No U-Turn Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=No_U-Turn_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9057"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:24:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “No U-Turn” Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“No U-Turn” (R3-4) signs are intended for use at or between intersections to indicate locations where U-turns are prohibited.  If “No U-Turn” (R3-4) signs are used, at least one should be placed over the roadway, at the far left-hand corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the “Stop” sign or “Yield” sign located on the near right-hand corner.  If signals are present the “No U-Turn” sign should be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left lane.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:R3-4.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
A field investigation is required to determine if a “No U-Turn” sign is to be installed.  The reviewer should observe whether the street has a median or not and if so, determine if there is a dedicated left turn bay.  If at a signalized intersection, the reviewer should determine if a right turn overlap from the minor street exists with the left turn phase from the major street that could cause a conflict if U-turns were permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===At intersections Without a Left Turn Bay:===&lt;br /&gt;
If there is not a dedicated left turn lane from which to negotiate the U-turn, the “No U-Turn” sign should be installed.  The intent is to reduce the blockage of a through lane of traffic by the U-turning vehicle while waiting for a gap in the opposing traffic stream and to minimize the potential for rear-end collisions by vehicles slowing to make this maneuver.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===At Signalized Intersections With Right Turn Overlap Phases:===&lt;br /&gt;
If there is a right turn overlap phase from the cross street occurring with a protected left turn movement that causes a vehicle conflict, the “No U-Turn” sign should be installed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At signalized intersections, The “No U-Turn” sign should be mounted on the signal pole adjacent to the left turn signal indication.  In the case of dual left turn lanes, the “No U-Turn” sign should be installed on the mast arm between the two left turn signal heads.  At unsignalized intersections, the sign should be installed in the median nose opposite the intersection, (or along the curb line in the case of a non-divided street), in a conspicuous location for full driver visibility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reviewer should also attempt to determine if any access agreement with property owners has been previously made which would provide exception with the above requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “No U-Turn” (R3-4) sign shall have a black legend and border on a reflectorized white background with a red “NO” symbol.  The “No U-Turn” (R3-4) sign shall be 24”x24” on conventional roadways with single lane approaches or on multi-lane conventional roadways with speeds less than or equal to 35 mph.  On multi-lane conventional roadways with speeds greater than 35 mph, the sign shall be 36”x36”.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Destination_Guide_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9056</id>
		<title>Destination Guide Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Destination_Guide_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9056"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:24:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Destination Guide” (D Series)  Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Destination Guide” signs are essential to direct road users along streets and highways, to inform them of intersecting routes, to direct them to cities, towns, villages, or other important destinations, to identify nearby rivers and streams, parks, forests, and historical sites, and generally to give such information as will help them along their way in the most simple, direct manner possible.  [[Image:Destination Guide Sign.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Destination Guide” (D1-1 through D1-3) signs shall display the name of a city, town, village, or other traffic generator, and a directional arrow.  If several destinations are to be displayed at a single point, then several names may be placed on a single sign with an arrow (and the distance, if desired) for each name. If more than one destination lies in the same direction, a single arrow may be used for such a group of destinations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An arrow pointing to the right shall be at the extreme right of the sign, and an arrow pointing left or up shall be at the extreme left.  An arrow pointing up may be placed at the extreme right of the sign when the sign is mounted to the left of the traffic to which it applies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Destination Guide” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination.  This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway.  Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway.  The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route.  Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction.  Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed.  Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Destination Guide “sign shall have a white message and border on a green background. All messages, borders, and legends shall be retro-reflective and all backgrounds shall be retro-reflective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For most “Destination Guide” signs, the legends are so variable that a standardized size is not appropriate. The sign size is determined primarily by the length of the message and the size of lettering and spacing necessary for proper legibility.  The shape of “Guide” shall be rectangular.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Rectifying_Plan_Images&amp;diff=9055</id>
		<title>Rectifying Plan Images</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Rectifying_Plan_Images&amp;diff=9055"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:24:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Phase_VI_-_Retrospect#Task_No._5_-_Update_City_Historical_Records|&#039;&#039;&#039;Back to Phase VI, Task 5&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rectifying Plan Images ===&lt;br /&gt;
(Last Revised 11/15/2006 by Bruce Wacker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Locate the ArcMap icon on your desktop [[Image:ArcMap logo.PNG ]]and double click it.&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic1.PNG|right|thumb|450px|Steps 2 and 3]]Once the application is open, you will see a “Start Up” box.  Click the button that says “Add Base Layers”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Using the magnifying glass “Zoom In” feature on the tool bar, zoom into the area that you want to insert a rectified plan sheet. Turn on the aerial photograph by selecting the “Add Layers” tool on the tool bar; click on the “+” next to “Air Photos”;  place a check in the box next to the “2006 Color 6in Orthophoto”; then click the “Add Selected Layers” button; then click “Close.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic2.PNG|right|thumb|450px|Step 4]]Create a bookmark so you can go back to this location quickly during this process.  Do this by clicking the down arrow near “Bookmarks” on the top right hand side of the menu bar.  Then click “Create”.  Name the bookmark by typing in a file name and click “OK”.&lt;br /&gt;
#Find the Plan Viewer icon on your desktop and double click it.  Find the plan sheet that you want to rectify.  Note the Project Number as well as the plan sheet number.  Then open up Windows Explorer and go to the following directory:  K:\Library\Plans\images\”Your Project Number”\”Desired Plan Sheet”&lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight the correct .TIF file with the desired plan sheet number and copy it to a location on your own C: drive that you will remember.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic3.PNG|left|thumb|600px|Step 7]]Return to ArcMap.  Find “Tools” in the top menu bar and click it.  Click “Customize” in the pull down menu and make sure that the box next to “Georeferencing” is checked.  Then you can close this dialog box. This will create a sub-menu that you can then “dock” in the top menu bar by clicking and dragging it. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic4.PNG|right|thumb|400px|Step 8]]Click on the ”Add Data” tool and browse to the location you saved the .TIF file you want to rectify.  Highlight the file name and select “Add”.  Another screen may come up asking if you want to “Build Pyramids”.  If so, click “YES”.  Then Click “OK”. This loads the sheet as a layer in the right hand “Layer” column.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Find the newly added layer in the right hand “Layer” column and right mouse click on it.  Select “Zoom to Layer”.  This will take you to the location in space where the layer was brought in at.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic5.PNG|left|thumb|450px|Step 10]] Find the “Layer” identification box on the tool bar and make sure it shows the plan sheet name that you want to insert.  If not, use the down arrow key at the right end of the box and select the appropriate file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic6.PNG|right|thumb|350px|Step 11]] Make sure the “Rotate Data Frame” angle is set to 0.  The default is 358 so everything appears vertical and horizontal.  However, the next process will not function unless you reset the angle to 0.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#The process of rectifying a drawing to the aerial in ArcMap requires that you select two points that are readily identifiable on both the plan sheet and the ArcMap application aerial.  Make sure the two points are located as far apart on the sheet as possible.  You will essentially be stretching the plan sheet across the two selected points.  The use of property corners or surveyed point on an existing curb may be the most accurate if available.  You can toggle between the plan view and the aerial view by selecting “View”, then “Bookmarks”, then the bookmark name that you saved earlier.  Right click the layer name on the left hand layer control box and select “Zoom to Layer” to get back to the plan view.  You can zoom in and out of either view without affecting the procedure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic7.PNG|right|thumb|350px|Step 13]]Locate the “Add Control Points” on the tool bar and click on it.  Pick the first common point from the plan sheet.  Zoom to your bookmark by selecting  “Bookmark” and the bookmark name you saved.  Pick the same common point on the ArcMap aerial view.  This will bring in a small scale plan view anchored at the first point you selected as shown below.[[Image:Rectifying plans pic8.PNG|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Zoom back to the plan sheet layer again by right clicking on the layer name on the right side of the ArcMap layer box.  Zoom in to the area near the second control point location.  Select the “Add Control Points” button again and select the second control point from the plan sheet view.  ALWAYS SELECT FROM THE PLAN SHEET VIEW FIRST THEN THE ARCMAP AERIAL VIEW.  Use the bookmark feature again and zoom to the ArcMap aerial view.  Select the common second control point from the ArcMap aerial view. This will stretch the plan sheet to full size in real space.&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic9.PNG|right|thumb|350px|Step 15]]On the right hand “Layer Control” column, double click on the layer for the plan sheet.  Select the “Display” tab and set the Transparency to 50%.  This will allow you to see through the plan sheet to see if the rest of the visible lines match with the aerial lines.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Image:Rectifying plans pic10.PNG|left|thumb|350px|Step 16]]Find the “Georeferencing” tool in the menu and click the down arrow next to it.  Select “Rectify….”.  When the “Save As” dialogue box pops up, type “rectified” in front of the filename and change the file format to “TIF” and click “Save”.  This will save the rectified plan sheet in the same place you saved the original .TIF file on your local hard drive with the same file name except it will have “rectified” in front of it.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy all the rectified plan files (all extensions) from your personal folder back to the K:\Library\Plans\images\”Your Project Number”\”Desired Plan Sheet”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Find the “CAMP” icon on your desktop and double click it.  Zoom to the desired area.  Go to “View” on the main menu screen and select “Add Rectified Plan Page”.[[Image:Rectifying plans pic11.PNG|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Browse to the location in K:\Library\Plans\images\”Your Project Number”\”Desired Plan Sheet” and locate the rectified plan sheet.  Then click “Open”.  This will bring the rectified plan sheet into CAMP.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the points (signs, light poles, junction boxes, etc.) on the plan sheet just as you would directly on the aerial view.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#To remove the rectified plan sheet, Click on “View” on the main menu and select “Remove Rectified Plan Page”.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Hospital_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9054</id>
		<title>Hospital Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Hospital_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9054"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:24:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Hospital” (D9-2), “Advance Turn” (M5 Series) and “Directional Arrow” (M6 Series) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:D9-2.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
“Hospital” (D9-2) signs are considered to be general service signs.  It is quite likely that general service signs for hospitals and police assistance will be desirable or necessary where such services are infrequent, and are to be found only on an intersecting highway or crossroad.  The “Hospital” (D9-2) signs, if used at intersections, shall be accompanied by a directional message such as the “Advance Turn” (M5 series) or “Directional Arrow” (M6 series) auxiliary signs.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Hospital Advance Turn and Directional Signs.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The sign should be installed at a suitable distance in advance of the turn-off point or intersecting street. Individual states that elect to provide service signing should establish a statewide policy or warrant for its use and criteria for the availability of services, based on national guidelines.  Local jurisdictions for such signing should follow the state policy for the sake of uniformity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The City of Overland Park has established the following policy for the installation of hospital signing that is consistent with the policy of the Kansas Department of Transportation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definition of Hospital:===&lt;br /&gt;
A facility that has:&lt;br /&gt;
#24-hour service, 7 days a week.&lt;br /&gt;
#Emergency department facilities with a Physician (or Emergency Care Nurse on duty within the Emergency department with a physician on-call) trained in Emergency Medical procedures on duty.&lt;br /&gt;
#Licensed or approved for definitive medical care by an appropriate State authority.&lt;br /&gt;
#Equipped for radio voice communications with ambulances and other hospitals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Purpose of Signing===&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of the &amp;quot;Hospital&amp;quot; sign is to direct motorists that are in need of immediate emergency medical attention from the state highway to the nearest emergency medical facility. An emergency medical (hospital) facility is defined above.  The signs are installed to specifically target the motorist who is unfamiliar with the area and not necessarily local traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a means of limiting the number of choices for the traveling public in a medical emergency as well as reducing the number of redundant signs, the City of Overland Park does not install these signs for the purpose of routing individuals to different emergency medical facilities.  As with other motorist service signs, the “Hospital” sign will only be installed on City streets in conjunction with the State installing similar signage on their state highway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Hospital” (D9-2) sign, “Advance Turn” (M5 series) and “Directional Arrow” (M6 series) signs shall have retro-reflectorized white letters, symbols and border on a retro-reflectorized or opaque blue background.  The “Hospital” (D9-2) sign shall be 24”x24” and the “Advance Turn” (M5 series) and “Directional Arrow” (M6 series) signs shall be 21”x15”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sign shall have either symbols or word messages, but the intermixing of symbols and word messages on one sign shall not be permitted.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Parking_Prohibition_/_Permissive_Parking_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9053</id>
		<title>Parking Prohibition / Permissive Parking Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Parking_Prohibition_/_Permissive_Parking_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9053"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:02:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guideline Regarding the Installation of &amp;quot;Parking Prohibition&amp;quot; or “Permissive Parking” (R7 and R8 Series) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD]), 2009 or latest edition, [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/traffic-control-signing.pdf City Resolution 4037 Section E] and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, Article XIII, Section 12.04.083 through Section 12.04.102].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;No Parking&amp;quot; (R7 and R8 Series) signs, by the MUTCD, are intended for use to establish parking restrictions according to State law and the City of Overland Park Municipal Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Parking signs should display the following information from top to bottom of the sign, in the order listed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. The restriction or prohibition;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not at all hours; and&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:R7 Series Parking Restriction Signs.JPG|left]][[Image:R7-108.JPG|next]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the parking restriction applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the restriction should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right and left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective restrictions apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, word messages such as BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, THIS SIDE OF SIGN, or BETWEEN SIGNS may be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background: ==&lt;br /&gt;
These guidelines are meant to create consistency within the city limits of the City of Overland Park in the installation and enforcement of parking control signs on City streets (Residential, Collector, Super Collector and Thoroughfare) and City parking lots. Its purpose is to provide a safe passageway for motorists by providing clear and consistent information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The goal of these guidelines is to create a standard for which parking control will be consistent for same street classifications throughout the City. However, due to varying types of unforeseen safety issues, the City Traffic Engineer shall have authority to install parking control, which varies from the standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Design Criteria:===&lt;br /&gt;
These guidelines were established using the following criteria as reference:&lt;br /&gt;
# Assume 1&#039;-6&amp;quot; of a 2&#039;-0&amp;quot; curb and gutter is usable for parking.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Assume a typical passenger car width of 7&#039;-0&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Assume a snow plow Truck width of 10&#039;-0&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Assume a fire truck requires a 10’-0” travel width and a minimum of 19&#039;-0&amp;quot; with the outriggers extended.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definitions:===&lt;br /&gt;
# Roadway Width - Measured from back of curb to back of curb, or edge of pavement to edge of pavement where no curb exists. Approximately eighteen inches of a two foot curb and gutter cross-section can be utilized when parking a vehicle on the road. Therefore, as an example, a 28&#039; back to back street has 27&#039; of usable roadway.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Road Segment Length - A typical block, from cross street to cross street, except in the cases of group mailboxes, fire hydrants, traffic calming measures, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Sign Spacing - Based on the height of the No Parking Symbol of 9 inches, the maximum spacing between consecutive signs is 270 feet. This is in keeping with the MUTCD to provide 1” of letter height for every 30 feet of visibility distance. [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|(Appendix A)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Enforceable Limitations - Any location signed using the R8-3 signs should be considered as No Parking up to an installed R8-3 (L) or R8-3 (R) sign. If no termination signs exist, the parking restriction should be considered terminated at the intersection of the next cross street.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Residential Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
====New Residential Street Construction:====&lt;br /&gt;
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 26’ or greater, parking is allowed on both sides of the roadway.  Safety issues shall dictate any variances to this policy.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 22’ or 24’, parking is only allowed on one side of the roadway.  The side of the street upon which parking shall be restricted will be based on sidewalk location, mail box locations, or other safety considerations such as adjacent parks, schools, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Existing Residential Streets:====&lt;br /&gt;
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets, or curbed and guttered streets with a width less than 26’ back of curb to back of curb, parking restrictions will be posted on one side of the street. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident the City may restrict parking on both sides of the street. &lt;br /&gt;
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets or curbed and guttered streets that meet or exceed the standard width of 26&#039; back of curb to back of curb, the posting of parking restrictions will be on a case by case basis. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident, the City will install signs that best address the situation. Otherwise a petition must be signed by the residents.  Where a Homes Association (or another such group which represents the residents) exists, a letter from this group can serve in place of a petition. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once an unimproved street is improved in conjunction with the City’s Neighborhood Streets Reconstruction Program, or any similar program, all “No Parking” signs that were existing prior to the improvement, will be removed where the improved street meets the requirements for New Construction, item 1 above. Residents wishing to have the signs reinstalled will be required to go through the petitioning process. Exception to this rule applies if a traffic study conducted during the design phase indicates that there is a need to keep the signs in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Parking Prohibition Request Petition Process:====&lt;br /&gt;
# Upon a request being submitted, a field investigation shall be initiated to determine whether the installation of &amp;quot;No Parking&amp;quot; sign(s) conform to this policy and will be enforceable under section 12.04 of the Overland Park Traffic Ordinance.&lt;br /&gt;
# When a petition is used it must be submitted by the requester with approval of over half of the homeowners who live along the affected street segment.&lt;br /&gt;
# The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved [[media:Parking Prohibition Request Petition Form.pdf|Parking Prohibition Request Petition Form]] to the requester listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
::a. The petition will state, based on a City staff field investigation, the side of the street that the parking restriction will affect.&lt;br /&gt;
::b. The requester shall circulate the petition to the addresses on the petition for the homeowner (one signature per household is all that will be accepted) to vote in either favor or against the parking restrictions. The petition must be approved by over half of the homeowners along any affected street.&lt;br /&gt;
::c. City staff will notify citizens at addresses on the returned petition that do not have a homeowner’s signature informing them that there has been a request for parking restrictions.  They will be given the opportunity to vote in favor or against the restrictions, unless the petition receives a majority vote without their signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Petition for the Removal of Parking Restriction Process:====&lt;br /&gt;
The removal of &amp;quot;No Parking&amp;quot; signs on existing residential streets will go through the same petitioning process as the addition of parking restrictions. Any street which had parking restriction signs installed as part of the petitioning process must wait twelve (12) months from the initial date of installation before it can be reviewed for removal of some or all of the parking restriction signs. &lt;br /&gt;
The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved [[media:PARKING PROHIBITION REMOVAL PETITION FORM.pdf|Parking Prohibition Removal Request Petition Form]] to the requester listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Collector Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
Parking may be restricted upon an engineering study for specific circumstances as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. This includes areas near schools, parks, bicycle routes, or other similar traffic generators with sufficient on-site parking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Thoroughfare and Super Collector Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
Parking is prohibited on all thoroughfare streets, except within the downtown Overland Park District as outlined below.  Parking is also prohibited on super collector streets.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
===Downtown District:===&lt;br /&gt;
# On-street parking in the downtown Overland Park district shall be limited to 2 or 3-hour parking unless otherwise posted as short-term (5 or 15 minute) parking as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.&lt;br /&gt;
# The following streets have been identified as falling within the Downtown District: Santa Fe Drive between 79th Street and Conser Street; 80th Street between Metcalf Avenue and Conser Street: Conser from Santa Fe to 79th: 79th St from Conser to Metcalf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other Typical Applications:===&lt;br /&gt;
The following applications are typical and do not reflect all possible situations where parking control may be needed. See [[media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|Appendix A]] for typical sign location applications and [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Section 12.04.085 of the Overland Park Municipal Code] for a complete listing of enforceable parking control situations:&lt;br /&gt;
# Fire hydrants – On-street parking shall be restricted fifteen (15) feet on either side of the Fire hydrant.&lt;br /&gt;
# Crosswalks – Parking shall be restricted within twenty (20) feet of a crosswalk at an intersection twenty (20) feet on either side of a mid-block crosswalk.&lt;br /&gt;
# Intersections – Parking shall be restricted within thirty (30) feet upon the approach to any flashing signal, stop sign, or traffic control signal located at the side of a roadway.&lt;br /&gt;
# Group mailboxes – Parking shall be restricted ten (10) feet on either side of the mailboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Streets with curb side mailboxes – Residential streets, which qualify for parking restrictions, and have residential mailboxes installed along the curb on one side of the street, should have the signs installed on the same side as the mailboxes to ensure un-interrupted delivery of mail.&lt;br /&gt;
# Streets with sidewalk on one side – Where there are residential streets that qualify for parking restrictions, and there is sidewalk on one side of the street, the side opposite of the sidewalk should have the parking restrictions installed. The mailbox rule above should take precedence when there is a conflict between these two applications.&lt;br /&gt;
# Residential Areas – In addition to the policy on residential street widths discussed above, parking control may be required in residential areas affected by, but not limited to bordering schools, parks and businesses. In all instances, a traffic study will be conducted and if deemed necessary, a parking petition must be circulated and approved by over half of the owners along any affected street.&lt;br /&gt;
# Schools – Schools will be signed on a case by case basis as indicated by a traffic study. Generally, signs and plaques may be installed indicating “No Stopping or Standing”, or “No Parking”, and may further specify times of the day and days of the week when effective.  Refer to signing standards for typical signs that will be installed in this situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Requests to Temporarily Cover Parking Restriction Signs:===&lt;br /&gt;
Exceptions to the above requirements may exist, or be granted, for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs for a short-term duration. In any such case where a request has been made and approved by the City Traffic Engineer to temporarily cover the signs, the City Traffic Maintenance Division will install sign coverings based on the time frame requested. In certain situations, such as over weekends or holidays, the requesting entity may be required to install and remove the coverings. City staff will notify the Administrative Assistant of the Traffic Services Division who will in turn notify the Overland Park Police Department, and the Traffic Services Maintenance Department of the approved request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The signs shall not be covered prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers will be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below is a list of exceptions that have been granted a blanket approval to cover No Parking signs.&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Exceptions Allowed by the City to Cover &amp;quot;No Parking&amp;quot; Signs (Blanket Approval&#039;&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Milburn Country Club&lt;br /&gt;
|Santa Fe Drive (71st Street to 67th Street)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Family Tree Nursery&lt;br /&gt;
|Farley (86th Street to 83rd Terrace)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;85th Street (Mastin to Carter)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Villa Saint Joseph Nursing Home&lt;br /&gt;
|Rosewood (119th Street to Tomahawk Creek Parkway&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
# Where approval has been granted to the entities listed in the chart above for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs, it is up to the requester to cover the sign prior to the event as well as to uncover the signs immediately following the event.&lt;br /&gt;
# The exceptions listed in the chart above have been given sign coverings to install and remove on their own, providing the appropriate granting of permission has been followed.&lt;br /&gt;
# The signs shall not be allowed to be covered prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers must be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event. In the event that these time frames are not adhered to, future requests from the requester may not be granted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Sign Colors===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;quot;Parking Prohibition&amp;quot; signs====&lt;br /&gt;
Where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times, the basic design for parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white retro-reflective background, except that the R8-3 sign shall have a black legend and border and a red circle and slash on a white retro-reflective background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;quot;Permissive Parking&amp;quot; signs====&lt;br /&gt;
Where only limited-time parking or parking in a particular manner are permitted, the signs shall have a green legend and border on a white retro-reflective background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;quot;Informational&amp;quot; plaques====&lt;br /&gt;
Additional information plaques may be mounted below or incorporated into the “Parking Prohibition” or “Permissive Parking” sign face. The text and border color shall match the color of the sign it supplements and shall be on a white retro-reflective background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sign Sizes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“No Parking” signs shall be 12” x 18” vertical rectangles. Additional &amp;quot;Informational&amp;quot; plaques mounted below the sign shall be 12” x 9” horizontal rectangles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Typical Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis: &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Typical No Parking Signs.JPG|center]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Stop_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9052</id>
		<title>Stop Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Stop_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9052"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:01:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Stop” Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, 12.04.032, 12.04.057 – 12.04.059, 12.04.080], and {{Resolution_4037}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===General Requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
Engineering judgment should be used to establish intersection control. The following factors should be considered:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. Vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic volumes on all approaches;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. Number and angle of approaches;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Approach speeds;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:D. Sight distance available on each approach; and&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:E. Reported crash experience.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
“Yield” or “Stop” signs should be used at an intersection if one or more of the following conditions exist:&lt;br /&gt;
:A. An intersection of a less important road with a main road where application of the normal right-of-way rule would not be expected to provide reasonable compliance with the law;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. A street entering a designated through highway or street; and/or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. An unsignalized intersection in a signalized area.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the use of “Yield” or “Stop” signs should be considered at the intersection of two minor streets or local roads where the intersection has more than three approaches and where one or more of the following conditions exist:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. The combined vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian volume entering the intersection from all approaches averages more than 2,000 units per day;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. The ability to see conflicting traffic on an approach is not sufficient to allow a road user to stop or yield in compliance with the normal right-of-way rule if such stopping or yielding is necessary; and/or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Crash records indicate that five or more crashes that involve the failure to yield the right-of-way at the intersection under the normal right-of-way rule have been reported within a 3-year period, or that three or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the decision has been made to control an intersection, the decision regarding the appropriate roadway to control should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the roadway carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be controlled.&lt;br /&gt;
A “Yield” or “Stop” sign should not be installed on the higher volume roadway unless justified by an engineering study. The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate roadway upon which to install a “Yield” or “Stop” sign where two roadways with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. Controlling the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. Controlling the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; and&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Controlling the direction that has the best sight distance from a controlled position to observe conflicting traffic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:R1-1 withR1-3P.PNG|right]] &lt;br /&gt;
When it is determined that a full stop is always required on an approach to an intersection, a “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be used. &lt;br /&gt;
At intersections where all approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs, an “All Way” supplemental plaque (R1-3P) shall be mounted below each “Stop” sign.  The “All Way” plaque shall only be used if all intersection approaches are controlled by “Stop” signs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At intersections where a full stop is not necessary at all times, consideration should first be given to using less restrictive measures such as ”Yield” signs.  The use of “Stop” signs on the minor-street approaches should be considered if engineering judgment indicates that a stop is always required because of one or more of the following conditions:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. The vehicular traffic volumes on the through street or highway exceed 6,000 vehicles per day;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. A restricted view exists that requires road users to stop in order to adequately observe conflicting traffic on the through street or highway; and/or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Crash records indicate that three or more crashes that are susceptible to correction by the installation of a “Stop” sign have been reported within a 12-month period, or that five or more such crashes have been reported within a 2-year period. Such crashes include right-angle collisions involving road users on the minor-street approach failing to yield the right-of-way to traffic on the through street or highway.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multi-way Stop Applications===&lt;br /&gt;
Multi-way stop control can be useful as a safety measure at intersections if certain traffic conditions exist. Safety concerns associated with multi-way stops include pedestrians, bicyclists, and all road users expecting other road users to stop. Multi-way stop control is used where the volume of traffic on the intersecting roads is approximately equal.  The decision to install multi-way stop control should be based on an engineering study.  The following criteria should be considered in the engineering study for a multi-way “Stop” sign installation:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. Where a traffic control signal is justified, the multi-way stop is an interim measure that can be installed quickly to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of the traffic control signal.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. Five or more reported crashes in a 12-month period that are susceptible to correction by a multi-way stop installation. Such crashes include right-turn and left-turn collisions as well as right-angle collisions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Minimum volumes: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#The vehicular volume entering the intersection from the major street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 300 vehicles per hour for any 8 hours of an average day; and&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#The combined vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle volume entering the intersection from the minor street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 200 units per hour for the same 8 hours, with an average delay to minor-street vehicular traffic of at least 30 seconds per vehicle during the highest hour; but&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:#If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants are 70 percent of the values provided in Items 1 and 2 above.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:D. Where no single criterion is satisfied, but where Criteria B, C.1, and C.2 are all satisfied to 80 percent of the minimum values. Criterion C.3 is excluded from this condition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other criteria that may be considered in an engineering study include:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:A. The need to control left-turn conflicts;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:B. The need to control vehicle/pedestrian conflicts near locations that generate high pedestrian volumes;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:C. Locations where a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop; and&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:D. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where multi-way stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Stop” sign shall be installed on the near side of the intersection on the right-hand side of the approach to which it applies. When the “Stop” sign is installed at this required location and the sign visibility is restricted, a “Stop Ahead” (W3-1) sign shall be installed in advance of the “Stop” sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Stop” sign should be located as close as practical to the intersection it regulates, while optimizing its visibility to the road user it is intended to regulate.  Stop lines that are used to supplement a “Stop” sign should be located at the point where the road user should stop.  Where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the “Stop” sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Two-Way Stop Control:===&lt;br /&gt;
A field investigation is required to determine if a “Stop” sign is to be installed at intersections except as noted in the following “Additional Installation Criteria”.  The reviewer should observe the intersection sight distance triangle to determine if adequate sight distance is available according to [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Controlled vs Uncontrolled.pdf|Case A (No Control, but Allowing Vehicles to Adjust Speed)]] in the [https://bookstore.transportation.org/item_details.aspx?id=1917 AASHTO publication A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets],latest edition.  Also refer to the [[media:Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control.pdf|Intersection Control Guidelines for Residential Streets-Stop vs Yield Control]] for additional guidelines for reviewing intersection sight distance for standard 28&#039; back to back residential streets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Multi-Way Stop Control:===&lt;br /&gt;
Multi-way “Stop” signs should only be installed if the intersection meets the warrants for a multi-way “Stop” as outlined in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (MUTCD).  24-hour traffic volumes should be collected in order to perform a full warrant analysis.  If it is suspected that traffic volumes are minimal from the side street, peak hour turning movement volumes only may be collected as a preliminary analysis.  Traffic accident information should also be reviewed for a continuous 12-month period to determine if the accident warrant is met.  If the 24-hour or peak hour volumes or accident numbers do not meet the minimum levels as outlined in the warrants for “Stop” signs according to the MUTCD, the multi-way “Stop” sign control will not be recommended for installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional City of Overland Park Installation Criteria:===&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditions for Immediate Justification of “Stop” Sign Installation:====&lt;br /&gt;
#On residential streets or collector streets at intersections with major thoroughfares.&lt;br /&gt;
#On residential streets at any intersection (3-leg or 4-leg) with collector streets.  This also includes cul-de-sac streets with street throats of any length except that “eye-brow” type cul-de-sacs will not require “Stop” signs.&lt;br /&gt;
#On private streets, commercial drive entrances or “eye-brow” cul-de-sacs that form the fourth leg of the intersection directly across from a residential or collector street that has “Stop” sign control or is scheduled to have “Stop” sign control.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the two minor approaches of residential streets at all four-way residential – residential street intersections in order to assign right-of-way. The minor streets will be determined based on volumes and engineering judgment.  Intersections with more than four legs and misaligned intersections will also be signed under this category based on engineering judgment.&lt;br /&gt;
#At residential / residential street “T”–intersections when the intersection sight distance requirements for the minor street with no control are not met.  The sight distance requirements are based on the guidelines indicated in the AASHTO publication, A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets, latest edition. (See the attached exhibits).  If the intersection sight distance triangle provides adequate sight distance for a yield condition for left or right turns, a “Yield” sign should be considered.  According to these criteria, whenever the sight triangle is limited based on yield conditions for left or right turns, a “Stop” sign shall be installed.    (See the “City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of Yield Signs”)&lt;br /&gt;
#At other locations as determined by the City Traffic Engineer to control traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditions for Consideration of “Stop” Signs upon Completion of a Traffic Study or Evaluation of a Request:====&lt;br /&gt;
#On private streets or commercial drives with long approaches that give the appearance of a public street.  This would include locations regardless of whether there is a separate concrete driveway approach apron or not.  Engineering judgment is used in making this determination.&lt;br /&gt;
#If an existing stop controlled private street or commercial drive is across from a new “uncontrolled” private street or commercial drive, a “Stop” sign may be installed on the new private street or commercial drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Conditions Where “Stop” Signs Will Not Be Installed:====&lt;br /&gt;
#When not warranted unless otherwise directed by Council action.&lt;br /&gt;
#If not meeting any of the above criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maintenance of Existing “Stop” Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
====When Existing “Stop” Signs Do NOT Meet the Above Guidelines:====&lt;br /&gt;
#On private streets or commercial drives that do not give the appearance of a through street, any existing signs will be left in place until they get knocked down or need maintenance.  At that time, the signs will not be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====When Existing “Stop” Signs Meet the Above Guidelines:====&lt;br /&gt;
#“Stop” signs meeting the above guidelines shall be re-installed immediately upon notification of a knockdown or other required maintenance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Converting a Multi-Way Stop Control to a Two-Way Stop Control===&lt;br /&gt;
The continued need for an existing multi-way stop control may be evaluated by the staff.  If the warrants for a multi-way stop as indicated above are not met a proposal will be presented to the Public Works Committee for conversion to a two-way stop control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sign Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Size:===&lt;br /&gt;
To assist in determining the proper “Stop” sign size that should be used in a particular situation, a [[media:Stop sign size flowchart.pdf|flowchart]] has been developed based on the following requirements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign that faces traffic on conventional multi-lane road approaches shall be 36” x 36”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where side roads intersect a conventional multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 45 mph or higher, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing the side road approach shall be 36” x 36”, even if the side road has only one approach lane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where side roads intersect a multi-lane road that has a posted speed limit of 40 mph or less, the minimum size of the “Stop” (R1-1) sign facing traffic on the side road approach shall be 30” x 30” if the side road has a single lane approach and 36” x 36” if the side road has a multi-lane approach. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard size of the “All Way” (R1-3p) plaque shall be 18” x 6”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color and Shape:===&lt;br /&gt;
The “Stop” (R1-1) sign shall be an octagon with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “All Way” (R1-3p) sign shall be a rectangle with a white legend and white border, on a retro-reflectorized red background.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable Overland Park Traffic Ordinances – Chapter 12.04: ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.32 Duties of City Traffic Engineer&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
:a) The City Traffic Engineer shall determine the installation and proper timing and maintenance of traffic control devices; conduct engineering analysis of traffic accidents and devise remedial measures; conduct engineering investigations of traffic conditions; plan the operation of traffic on the streets and highways of this City; cooperate with other City officials in the development of ways and means to improve traffic conditions; and carry out the additional powers and duties imposed by ordinances of this City.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:b) The City Traffic Engineer, the Assistant City Traffic Engineer, or the Director of Public Works shall place, maintain, change, and remove traffic control signs, signals, and devices, when and as required under the traffic ordinances of this City to make effective and carry out the provisions of said ordinances, and may place, maintain, change and remove such additional traffic control devices as he may deem necessary to regulate traffic or to warn or guide traffic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: Ord. TC-1260,C §1,86;TC-1260 §31,84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ARTICLE X. RIGHT-OF-WAY ===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.057 Vehicles Approaching or Entering Intersection.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:a) When two vehicles approach or enter an intersection from different highways at approximately the same time, the driver of the vehicle on the left shall yield the right-of-way to the vehicle on the right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:b) The right-of-way rule declared in subsection (a) is modified at through highways and otherwise as hereinafter stated in this ordinance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1526; Ord. TC-1260PP &#039;3, 98; TC-1260 &#039;56, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.058 Vehicle Turning Left.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The driver of a vehicle intending to turn to the left within an intersection or into any alley, private road or driveway shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle approaching from the opposite direction which is within the intersection or so close thereto as to constitute an immediate hazard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1527; Ord. TC-1260 &#039;57, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.59 Stop Signs and Yield Signs.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:a) Preferential right-of-way may be indicated by stop signs or yield signs.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:b) Except when directed to proceed by a police officer, every driver of a vehicle approaching a stop sign shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it.  After having stopped, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:c) The driver of a vehicle approaching a yield sign shall in obedience to such sign slow down to a speed reasonable for the existing conditions and if required for safety to stop, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if none, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or, if none, then at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering it.  After slowing or stopping, the driver shall yield the right-of-way to any vehicle in the intersection or approaching on another roadway so closely as to constitute an immediate hazard during the time when such driver is moving across or within the intersection or junction of roadways. Such driver shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians within an adjacent crosswalk.  If a driver is involved in a collision with a vehicle in the intersection or junction of roadways or with a pedestrian in an adjacent crosswalk, after driving past a yield sign without stopping, such collision shall be deemed prima facie evidence of the driver&#039;s failure to yield right-of-way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1528; Ord. TC-1260, KK §6, 95; TC-1260 §58, 84)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;12.04.080 Emerging from Alley or Private Driveway or Building.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The driver of a vehicle emerging from an alley, building, private road or driveway within a&lt;br /&gt;
business or residence district shall stop such vehicle immediately prior to driving onto a sidewalk or onto the sidewalk area extending across such alley, building entrance, road or driveway, or in the event there is no sidewalk area, shall stop at the point nearest the street to be entered where the driver has a view of approaching traffic thereon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(History: K.S.A.8-1555; Ord. TC-1260 &#039;79, 84)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Disabled_Parking_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9051</id>
		<title>Disabled Parking Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Disabled_Parking_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9051"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:01:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of On-Street Disabled Parking Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Disabled Parking” (R7-8) signs are intended to be used for parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities.  Where parking spaces that are reserved for persons with disabilities are designated to accommodate wheelchair vans, a “Van Accessible” (R7-8P) plaque shall be mounted below the R7-8 sign. [[Image:R7-8 &amp;amp; R7-8P.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation:&lt;br /&gt;
Upon receiving a request for a disabled parking space an engineering study will be initiated.  Requests will be approved by the City Traffic Engineer. To be considered for approval the following conditions must be met: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#The requestor must provide documentation that a Disabled Parking permit has been issued by the State of Kansas.&lt;br /&gt;
#The road on which the disabled parking space is requested is classified as a residential street.&lt;br /&gt;
#Traffic flow on the road on which the disabled parking space is requested will not be hindered.&lt;br /&gt;
#The approval of the disabled parking space will not put the City in a position such that work, other than the signing of the space, must be done to comply with ADA requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The request should include enough information to determine if the sign will be for a passenger car or for a van.  Disabled parking spaces will be granted for a period of one year. To remain in effect, the requestor must provide a request for extension.  The request must be in writing, must include documentation of a valid Disabled Parking permit, and must be received before the start of the new calendar year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Disabled Parking” (R7-8) sign shall have a green legend and border and a white wheelchair symbol on a blue square, all on a white retro-reflectorized background.  The sign shall be 12” x 18” in size.  The “Van Accessible” (R7-8P) plaque shall have a green legend and border on a white retro-reflectorized background.  The plaque shall be 18” x 9” in size.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Street_Name_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9050</id>
		<title>Street Name Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Street_Name_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9050"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:01:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Street Name” (D3-1) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Street Name” (D3-1) signs should be installed in urban areas at all street intersections regardless of other route signs that might be present and should be installed in rural areas to identify important roads that are not otherwise signed. [[Image:D3-1 Ground Mounted.png|right|.75]]&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
In business or commercial areas and on principal arterials, “Street Name” (D3-1) signs should be placed at least on diagonally opposite corners. In residential areas, at least one “Street Name” (D3-1) sign should be mounted at each intersection. Signs naming both streets should be installed at each intersection. They should be mounted with their faces parallel to the streets they name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To optimize visibility, “Street Name” (D3-1) signs may be mounted overhead.  “Street Name” (D3-1) signs may also be placed above a regulatory or “Stop” or “Yield” sign with no required vertical separation. At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, both street names may be displayed on the same sign along with directional arrows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following two tables are the Standard List of Abbreviations for street name sign legends in the City of Overland Park:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ABBREVIATIONS FOR STREET NAME DESIGNATIONS ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;500px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Designation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Abbreviation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Designation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Abbreviation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|AVENUE&lt;br /&gt;
|AVE&lt;br /&gt;
|PARKWAY&lt;br /&gt;
|PKY&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|BOULEVARD&lt;br /&gt;
|BLVD&lt;br /&gt;
|PLACE&lt;br /&gt;
|PL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CIRCLE&lt;br /&gt;
|CIR&lt;br /&gt;
|PLAZA&lt;br /&gt;
|PLZ&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|COURT&lt;br /&gt;
|CT&lt;br /&gt;
|ROAD&lt;br /&gt;
|RD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CREEK&lt;br /&gt;
|CR&lt;br /&gt;
|STREET&lt;br /&gt;
|ST&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|DRIVE&lt;br /&gt;
|DR&lt;br /&gt;
|TERRACE&lt;br /&gt;
|TER&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HIGHWAY&lt;br /&gt;
|HWY&lt;br /&gt;
|TRAIL&lt;br /&gt;
|TR&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
||LANE	&lt;br /&gt;
|LN&lt;br /&gt;
|WAY&lt;br /&gt;
|WAY&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
=== ABBREVIATIONS FOR NUMERICAL DESIGNATIONS ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| width=&amp;quot;500px&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Designation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:#f0f0f0;&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;&#039;Abbreviation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|FIRST&lt;br /&gt;
|ST&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|SECOND&lt;br /&gt;
|ND&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|THIRD&lt;br /&gt;
|RD&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|FOURTH TO NINTH&lt;br /&gt;
|TH&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
There are two separate guidelines for Street Name signs depending if they are post-mounted or overhead mounted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Overhead Street Name Signs:===&lt;br /&gt;
====General Guidelines:====&lt;br /&gt;
The Street Name sign will consist of the name of the street, the designation of the street and where physically practical, the block number.  It is understood that certain situations preclude the installation of the block number.  These situations are not listed specifically, but will be addressed as the specific circumstances arise.  It is the general intent that whenever possible, the block number should be included on the Street Name sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard aluminum sign blank shall be 18” high by 60”, 72” or 84” in length depending on the length of the legend.  In some cases, sign blanks ranging from 96” to 120” or longer will have to be used to accommodate longer street names.  In cases where the sign length is too long to fit on the mast arm, the sign length will be adjusted accordingly by reducing the letter spacing.  The lettering style shall conform to Highway Series E-modified 2000 uppercase and lowercase lettering with 100% recommended letter spacing according to the Standard Highway Sign Manual.  The letter height of the street name shall be 8” for uppercase and 6” for lowercase.  The letter height of the street designation shall be 5” for uppercase and 3 ¾” for lowercase.  The letter height for the block number shall be 5”.  The letter height of the numeral extension such as “th” in “127th” shall also be 6” high lowercase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The street designation and the block number should be located at the right hand side of the blank and centered above each other as indicated in the standard details.  If there is not a street designation, the block number should be centered vertically in the sign blank.  Any arrow designations should be centered vertically in the sign blank and be 7 ½” high by 9 ½” long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to the City of Overland Park Overhead Street Name Sign Standard Details for guidance in sign layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Practical Guidelines and Design Options for Overhead Mounted Street Name Signs:====&lt;br /&gt;
There are practical guidelines that should be observed during the design or fabrication of street name signs.  If a sign legend is such that the design length of the sign is slightly longer than the next smallest sign blank, judgment may be exercised with letter spacing to achieve the most cost effective solution.  In specific instances, the sign length may have to be reduced due to physical limitations, i.e. so it fits between signal heads on the mast arm.  The following options are presented in order of preference to assist the fabricator in selecting the correct length of sign blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 60”, 72” and 84” long sign blanks=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series Emod 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.  If the lettering does not fit on the smaller sign blank, use the next size larger sign size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 96” and 108” long sign blanks for use with longer street names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series Emod 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 1&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:In order to avoid using the next larger sign blank, Highway Series Emod 2000 letter spacing may be reduced by a maximum of 20% (80% of the recommended spacing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 120” long or greater sign blanks for use with longer street names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series Emod 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series Emod 2000 letter spacing reduced by a percentage such that the legend will not exceed the available space on the mast arm.  These cases should be reviewed individually prior to fabrication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Locations of Overhead Street Name Signs:====&lt;br /&gt;
Overhead Street Name signs will be installed on the mast arms of traffic signals.  The Overhead Street Name sign will generally be installed between the vertical pole shaft and the first traffic signal head and centered as much as possible on the lane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overhead Street Name signs will not be installed at locations designating private commercial drive entrances nor private streets.  They also will not be installed for interstate ramp designations at interchanges with thoroughfare streets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Streets with Multiple Names:====&lt;br /&gt;
At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, both street names should be shown on the same sign along with directional arrows.  The street name with the left arrow should be placed on top of the street name with the right arrow.  The sign height should be increased to 24”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Post-Mounted Street Name Signs:===&lt;br /&gt;
====General Guidelines:====&lt;br /&gt;
The Street Name sign will consist of the name of the street, the designation of the street and where physically practical, the block number.  It is understood that certain situations preclude the installation of the block number.  These situations are not listed specifically, but will be addressed as the specific circumstances arise.  It is the general intent that whenever possible, the block numbers should be included on the Street Name sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The standard sized aluminum sign blanks shall be 12” high by 24”, 30” or 36” in length depending on the length of the legend.  In some cases, 42” and 48” long sign blanks will have to be used to accommodate longer street names.  In no case will the sign length be longer than 48”.  The standard lettering style shall conform to Highway Series C 2000 with a leading uppercase letter and trailing lowercase letters with 100% recommended letter spacing according to the Standard Highway Sign Manual.  The letter height of the uppercase letter in the street name shall be 6”.  The lowercase letters in the street name shall be 4 ½”.  The uppercase letter height of the street designation and the block number shall be 3”.   The lowercase letter height of the street designation shall be 2 ¼”.  The letter height of the numeral extension such as “th” in “127th” shall also be 3” high composed of all lowercase letters.  A minimum of 1 ¼” spacing is required between the edge of the sign blank and the edge of the first and last letter in the legend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The street designation and the block number should be located at the right hand side of the blank and centered above each other as indicated in the standard details.  If there is not a street designation, the block number should be centered vertically in the sign blank.  Any arrow designations should be centered vertically in the sign blank and be 3” high by 4” long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to the City of Overland Park Street Name Sign Standard Details for guidance in sign layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Practical Guidelines and Design Options for Post Mounted Street Name Signs:====&lt;br /&gt;
There are practical guidelines that should be observed during the design or fabrication of street name signs.  If a sign legend is such that the design length of the sign is slightly longer than the next smallest sign blank, judgment may be exercised with letter spacing to achieve the most cost effective solution.  The following guidelines are presented in order of preference to assist the fabricator in selecting the correct length of sign blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 24” and 30” long sign blanks=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series C 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.  If the lettering does not fit on the smaller sign blank, use the next size larger sign size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 36” long sign blanks=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series C 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:In order to avoid using the next larger sign blank, Highway Series C2000 letter spacing may be reduced by a maximum of 20% (80% of the recommended spacing).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series B 2000 lettering with 100% recommended letter spacing may also be used to avoid exceeding a 36” sign blank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 42” long sign blanks which are necessary for longer street names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series C 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series C 2000 letters with up to 80% recommended letter spacing is acceptable.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series B 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is acceptable.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 3&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:In order to avoid using the next larger sign blank, Highway Series B 2000 letter spacing may be reduced by a maximum of 20% (80% of the recommended spacing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====For 48” long sign blanks which are necessary for longer street names=====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Standard&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series C 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is the preferred design.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 1&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series C 2000 letters with 80% recommended letter spacing is acceptable.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 2&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series B 2000 letters with 100% recommended letter spacing is acceptable.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 3&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series B 2000 letter spacing may be reduced by a maximum of 20% (80% of the recommended spacing).&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Option 4&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Highway Series B 2000 letter spacing reduced by a percentage such that the legend will not exceed a 48” sign.  These cases should be reviewed individually prior to fabrication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Locations of Post-Mounted Street Name Signs at Four or More Legged Intersections:====&lt;br /&gt;
If the major street is at least 36’ wide from back of curb to back of curb, two sign installations are required.  One post-mounted Street Name sign should be placed on each diagonally opposite corner so that they will be on the far right side of the intersection for traffic on the major street.  Traffic Engineering staff should determine the major street.  In most cases, other than residential-residential street intersections, it should be evident.  In general, the street that does not have any type of control would be declared the major street.  Where the intersection is still an uncontrolled 4-way intersection, City practice would require that we install stop signs on the minor legs and the street name signs would be mounted above the stop sign.  The final decision in this example would be made by Traffic Engineering staff. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only one Street Name sign should be mounted at each intersection where the major street is less than 36’ wide from back of curb to back of curb.  The street name sign should be located at the far right side of the intersection for traffic on the major street unless otherwise approved due to field restrictions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signs naming both streets should be installed at each intersection. They should be mounted with their faces parallel to the streets they name.  They may be installed above a regulatory sign such as a yield sign or stop sign and may be installed with the W14-2a “No Outlet” sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Locations of Post-Mounted Street Name Signs at Tee Intersections on Roadways Wider Than 36 Feet:====&lt;br /&gt;
Two Street Name signs are required and should be placed on the far right side of the intersection for traffic on the major street and the diagonally opposite corner unless otherwise approved due to field restrictions.  This places one sign at the side of the minor road at the top of the tee.  In that case, only one of the major street sign faces is required since it is visible only from one direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Streets with Multiple Names:====&lt;br /&gt;
At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, one 12” high Street Name sign with directional arrows shall be used for each street.  They should be mounted on top of each other with the left arrow sign to be placed above the right arrow sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Street Name” (D3-1) sign for both overhead mounted and post mounted installations shall be retro-reflective to show the same shape and similar color both day and night. The legend and background shall be of contrasting colors.  “Street Name” (D3-1) signs should have a white legend on a green background. A border, if used, should be the same color as the legend.  The City of Overland Park currently only uses a border on overhead street name signs but not on ground mounted street name signs.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Deer_Crossing_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9049</id>
		<title>Deer Crossing Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Deer_Crossing_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9049"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:01:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Deer Crossing” (W11-3) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Advance Deer Crossing” (W11-3) signs are intended for use to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway might occur or where shared use of the roadway by deer might occur.  These conflicts may be relatively confined, or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.[[Image:W11-3.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Deer Crossing” sign should be posted at locations that are unusually hazardous or at locations not readily apparent.  They should be located immediately adjacent to the crossing location.  Where crossings are confined to a single location, the “Advance Deer Crossing” sign may be supplemented with an auxiliary distance sign specifying the distance to the crossing, or the crossing point may be identified by a “Deer Crossing” sign. If the crossing locations are random, an auxiliary distance sign (Supplemental Plate) specifying the length of roadway section upon which the potential hazard exists may be used below the “Advance Deer Crossing” sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The guidelines for installing “Advance Deer Crossing” signs or “Deer Crossing” signs are based on the number of accidents within a given length of roadway.  The sign(s) should be posted if three deer accidents occur in a 1/4-mile section within a 12-month period, or if ten deer accidents occur in a one-mile section over a 12-month period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the crossing location is generally confined to a single crossing location, the “Deer Crossing” sign will be used.  Otherwise the “Advance Deer Crossing” sign will be used with a supplemental plate specifying the length of roadway section upon which the potential hazard exists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Advance Deer Crossing” (W11-3) sign shall have black letters, on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.  It shall be a 30” x 30” diamond shaped sign on conventional type roadways with a single lane approach or for multi-lane conventional roadways with a posted speed limit equal to or less than 35 mph.  On multi-lane conventional roadways with a posted speed limit greater than 35 mph, the sign shall be 36” x 36”.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Cultural_Interest_Area_Guide_Signs_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9048</id>
		<title>Cultural Interest Area Guide Signs Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Cultural_Interest_Area_Guide_Signs_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9048"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T15:00:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Guide” (RS Series) signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area.  [[Image:RS_Park.png|right]]Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites.[[Image:RS_Park2.png|right]]   “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs directing road users to significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas.  “Recreational and cultural interest area guide” signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
Correspondence with the Kansas Department of Transportation (KDOT) is required to determine if a “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” sign is to be installed on city streets. The City guidelines require that the sign be used to orient and guide the motorist from a specific point of beginning to a specific point of ending.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination.  This initial point shall be a recognized guide sign approved by KDOT which is placed on the interstate or a major highway.  Once KDOT approves the sign installation on the interstate or major highway, the City will install additional guide signs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of beginning is the intersection of the city street and the interstate ramp or highway.  The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route.  Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction.  Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed.  Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” signs shall have a white message and border on a brown background. All messages, borders, and legends shall be retro-reflective and all backgrounds shall be retro-reflective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For most “Recreational and Cultural Interest Area” signs, the legends are so variable that a standardized size is not appropriate. The sign size is determined primarily by the length of the message and the size of lettering and spacing necessary for proper legibility.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Recreational or cultural interest area” signs should be rectangular or trapezoidal in shape.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=No_Outlet_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9047</id>
		<title>No Outlet Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=No_Outlet_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9047"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T14:58:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “No Outlet” &lt;br /&gt;
(W14-2 and W14-2a) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“No Outlet” (W14-2) signs may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sign should be posted as near as practical to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street. [[Image:W14-2 &amp;amp; W14-2a.png|right|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“No Outlet” (W14-2a) plaques may be used in combination with the Street Name signs at intersections to warn turning traffic that the cross street ends in the direction indicated by the arrow instead of or in addition to the W14-2 signs.  The “No Outlet” (W14-2a) plaque shall not be used instead of the W14-2 sign where traffic can proceed straight through the intersection into the no outlet area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
A field investigation is required to determine if a “No Outlet” sign or plaque is to be installed.  The reviewer should stand at the intersection of the centerlines of both the dead end street and the through street.  With a 3.5’ eye height, the reviewer should look down the dead end street to determine if the end of the cul-de-sac bulb can be clearly viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the end of the cul-de-sac bulb is visible from the 3.5’ eye height, the “No Outlet” sign or plaque should not be installed.  If the end of the cul-de-sac bulb is not visible, the sign should be installed as near to the right hand corner as possible and clearly visible to approaching traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In borderline cases, the location should be field checked at night to determine if the “No Outlet” sign is required.  If it is difficult to see the end of the cul-de-sac bulb with the existing street lighting system in place, the sign should be installed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “No Outlet” plaque (W14-2a) shall be installed in conjunction with the Street Name sign whenever possible instead of the standard (W14-2) sign.  However, the (W14-2) sign shall be installed in situations where traffic can proceed straight through the intersection to the dead end or no outlet street and where the (W14-2a) plaque in combination with the Street Name sign would have to be mounted parallel to the dead end or no outlet street and not be visible to the street user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “No Outlet” (W14-2) sign or the “No Outlet” (W14-2a) plaque shall have a black legend and border, on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.  The size of the “No Outlet” (W14-2) sign shall be a minimum of 30” x 30” for conventional roads with single lane approaches and on multi-lane approaches when the speed limit is less than or equal to 35 mph and 36” x 36” for multi-lane approaches with speeds between 35 mph and 55 mph.  The size of the (W14-2a) plaque shall be 36” x 12”.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=General_Information_/_Miscellaneous_Information_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9046</id>
		<title>General Information / Miscellaneous Information Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=General_Information_/_Miscellaneous_Information_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9046"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T14:57:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “General Information” / “Miscellaneous Information” (I Series) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“General Information” (I Series) signs can properly convey numerous kinds of information, though not directly necessary for guidance. They include such items as State lines, City limits, other political boundaries, time zones, stream names, elevations, landmarks, and similar items of geographical interest, and safety and transportation-related messages. “General Information” signs should not be installed within a series of guide signs or at other equally critical locations, unless there are specific reasons for orienting the road user or identifying control points for activities that are clearly in the public interest. On all such signs, the designs should be simple and dignified, devoid of any advertising, and in general conformance with other guide signing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An information symbol sign (I-5 through I-9) may be used to identify a route leading to a transportation or general information facility, or to provide additional guidance to the facility. The symbol sign may be supplemented by an educational plaque where necessary.  The name of the facility may be used if needed to distinguish between similar facilities.  &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:I Series Signs.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Advance Turn (M5 series) or Directional Arrow (M6 series) auxiliary signs with white arrows on green backgrounds may be used with “General Information” symbol signs to create a “General Information Directional Assembly”.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Advance Turn and Directional Signs.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Miscellaneous Information Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Miscellaneous Information” (I Series) signs are used to point out geographical features, such as rivers and summits, and other jurisdictional boundaries signs.  They may be used if they do not interfere with signing for interchanges or other critical points. [[Image:Geographic Information Signs.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
===General Information Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“General Information” signs may be installed as appropriate or at the discretion of the City Traffic Engineer.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To qualify for installation, there has to be an initial point from which a motorist would likely have to encounter the first sign to be able to proceed to the desired destination.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of beginning is the intersection of the major thoroughfare street that intersects with the street that the facility is located on.  The point of ending is the destination or the actual location of the facility for which the directions are intended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A minimum number of signs shall be installed to provide guidance to the traveling public via the shortest or most direct route.  Signs will be placed in advance of the intersection where the motorist is required to change direction.  Intermediate mid-block signs will not be installed.  Signs will not be installed to direct the motorist to any private drives off of a city street.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Miscellaneous Information Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
“Miscellaneous Information” signs may be installed as appropriate or at the discretion of the City Traffic Engineer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “General Information” and “Miscellaneous Information” sign shall have a white message and border on a green background. All messages, borders, and legends shall be retro-reflective and all backgrounds shall be retro-reflective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For most “General Information” and “Miscellaneous Information” signs, the legends are so variable that a standardized size is not appropriate. The sign size is determined primarily by the length of the message and the size of lettering and spacing necessary for proper legibility.  The shape of “General Information” and “Miscellaneous Information” signs shall be rectangular.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Object_Marker_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9045</id>
		<title>Object Marker Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Object_Marker_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9045"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T14:56:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Type 1 Object Markers” (OM1-3)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Type 1 Object Markers” (OM1-3) are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. [[Image:OM1-3.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When used for marking obstructions within the roadway or obstructions that are 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, measured from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, should be at least 4 feet.  When used to mark obstructions more than 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clearance from the ground to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 4 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Obstructions within the roadway shall be marked with a Type 1 or Type 3 object marker. In addition to markers on the face of the obstruction, warning of approach to the obstruction shall be given by appropriate pavement markings.  Type 1 or Type 3 object markers may be installed at or near the approach end of a median island.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By definition, the “roadway” is that portion of a highway improved, designed, or ordinarily used for vehicular travel and parking lanes, but exclusive of the sidewalk, berm, or shoulder even though such sidewalk, berm, or shoulder is used by persons riding bicycles or other human-powered vehicles. In the event a highway includes two or more separate roadways, the term roadway as used herein shall refer to any such roadway separately, but not to all such roadways collectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Type 1 Object Markers” will be installed at locations based on the following criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Thoroughfare Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Type 1 Object Markers” should be installed in the median approach nose on all thoroughfare streets.  It is not required to install the “Type 1 Object Markers” in the median nose on the side streets intersecting a thoroughfare if the side street has a median except for conditions as listed in the following section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Collector or Residential Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Type 1 Object Marker” should be installed in the median approach nose at all mid-block medians where the street is otherwise undivided.  This generally occurs at locations where the median is relatively short in length and is installed as a traffic calming measure.&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Type 1 Object Marker” is not required in locations where a flush-mounted median (Type A curb and gutter section) is used. &lt;br /&gt;
#Type 1 Object Markers” are not required to be installed in the approach nose of a splitter island within roundabouts.&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Type 1 Object Marker” is not required on a minor street raised median located on the approach to an intersection except:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::a) When the only thing located in the median is a traffic signal pole or street light pole.  This would occur most  frequently at intersections of thoroughfare streets with collector streets.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::b) If the median consists of both landscaping and signal poles or lighting poles, the “Type 1 Object Marker” will not be installed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Type 1 Object Marker” should be installed in the earth median directly behind the concrete median nose.  In locations where there is no concrete median nose, the “Type 1 Object Marker” should be installed at least 4 feet behind the median curb measuring from the approach end.  In narrow medians that consist of a concrete base and brick pavers, the sign should be installed in a PVC pipe sleeve cored through the pavement and paver bricks approximately 6” from the back side of the concrete median nose according to the standard details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Removal of Existing Signs===&lt;br /&gt;
All existing signs that no longer meet the above criteria will be removed systematically in areas where the existing signing is being updated.  Knocked-down signs will not be reinstalled if they no longer meet these criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Type 1 Object Marker” (OM1-3) sign shall be an 18” x 18” diamond sign with yellow retro-reflectorized sheeting.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Emergency_Vehicle_and_Emergency_Signal_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9044</id>
		<title>Emergency Vehicle and Emergency Signal Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Emergency_Vehicle_and_Emergency_Signal_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9044"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T14:55:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) and “Emergency Signal” (R10-13) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements:  ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:W11-8.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
“Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) signs may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by emergency vehicles might occur. These locations might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway.  The signs should be used only at locations where the road user&#039;s sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected. If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist. &lt;br /&gt;
The “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) sign, or a word message sign indicating the type of emergency vehicle (such as rescue squad), may be used in advance of the emergency vehicle station when no emergency-vehicle traffic control signal is present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supplemental plaques with legends such as AHEAD, XX METERS (XX FEET), NEXT XX km (NEXT XX MILES), or SHARE THE ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) sign with a supplementary plaque with the “Emergency Signal Ahead&amp;quot; (W11-12p) shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals. [[Image:W11-12P.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Emergency Signal” (R10-13) sign shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals.  It shall be mounted adjacent to a signal face on each major street approach. If an overhead signal face is provided, the “Emergency Signal” sign shall be mounted adjacent to the overhead signal face. [[Image:R10-13.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of the &amp;quot;Emergency Vehicle&amp;quot; (W11-8) sign is to indicate that emergency vehicles may be entering the roadway from emergency service facilities and to convey to the motorist that they should be prepared to stop.  An emergency service facility is defined as a municipal fire station or med-act facility.  These signs are installed to specifically target the motorist who is unfamiliar with the area and not necessarily local traffic.  Fire stations have unexpected activity, such as people going to the station for emergency help or fire trucks blocking traffic to back into the station.  The warning sign is intended to make motorists aware of the fire station and such associated activities.  They should be installed at a suitable distance in advance of the intersection based on the requirements in the MUTCD for warning signs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Shared Traffic Signalized Intersection:===&lt;br /&gt;
A shared traffic signalized intersection is defined as a traffic signal that is used by both the emergency service station and local traffic.  The traffic signal cycles normally throughout the day and only pre-empts through traffic when there is a call from the emergency service station drive entrance. Examples of this type of shared signal are:&lt;br /&gt;
#119th Street and Hardy&lt;br /&gt;
#75th Street and Conser&lt;br /&gt;
#Switzer Road and Deanna Rose Farmstead Entrance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At a shared signalized intersection on thoroughfares and/or collectors that consists of shared use by both the emergency service station and local traffic, “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) signs shall be installed at a distance prior to the intersection.  For the residential streets and driveways that enter this signal, signage is to be determined by the amount of traffic volume or accident rates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dedicated Traffic Signalized Intersection:===&lt;br /&gt;
A dedicated traffic signalized intersection is defined as a traffic signal that only cycles when emergency vehicles are entering or leaving the station.  The signal is then considered an “emergency signal”.  Examples of this type of dedicated signals are:&lt;br /&gt;
#Metcalf Avenue and the Fire Station, south of 159th Street&lt;br /&gt;
#95th Street and the Fire Station, west of Grant Street&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) sign, with an “Emergency Signal Ahead” (W11-12p) plaque mounted below, shall be placed in advance of the emergency signal.  The “Emergency Signal” (R10-13) sign shall be mounted adjacent to a signal face on each major street approach to the emergency signal. If an overhead signal face is provided, the “Emergency Signal” (R10-13) sign shall be mounted adjacent to the overhead signal face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) sign and the “Emergency Signal Ahead” (W11-12p) plaque shall have a black legend, symbols and border on a retro-reflectorized yellow background.  The “Emergency Vehicle” (W11-8) sign shall be a 30” x 30” diamond shaped sign on conventional type roadways with a single lane approach or for multi-lane conventional roadways with a posted speed limit greater than 35 mph, the sign shall be 36” x 36”.  The “Emergency Signal Ahead” (W11-12p) plaque shall be 36” x 30”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Emergency Signal” (R10-13) sign shall have a black legend and border on a white retro-reflectorized background.  It shall be 42” x 30”.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=End_of_Roadway_Markers_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9043</id>
		<title>End of Roadway Markers Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=End_of_Roadway_Markers_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9043"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T14:55:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Type 4 Object Markers” / “End of Roadway Markers” (OM4-3)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Type 4 Object Markers” (OM4-3) are used to mark the end of a roadway. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The minimum mounting height, measured vertically from the bottom of the object marker to the elevation of the near edge of the traveled way, shall be 4 feet. [[Image:OM4-3.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Type 4 Object Markers” (OM4-3) will be installed at locations where the roadway ends abruptly.  This does not include cul-de-sac bulbs.  Typically, instances were the roadway could possibly end abruptly are temporary situations between construction phases in residential development.  However, due to changes in development patterns, economic conditions or other changes, the condition may last permanently.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple signs should be installed on separate posts, within two feet from the end of the paved surface, across the entire width of the roadway such that the spacing between sign posts and the spacing between the outside sign posts and the back of curb is less than 6 feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Type 4 Object Marker” (OM4-3) sign shall be an 18” x 18” diamond sign with red retro-reflectorized sheeting.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Keep_Right_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9042</id>
		<title>Keep Right Sign Design Guidelines</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Keep_Right_Sign_Design_Guidelines&amp;diff=9042"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T14:55:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Text replacement - &amp;quot;[[File:&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;[[Image:&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “Keep Right” (R4-7) Signs&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Governing Document Reference: ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2009 or latest edition and the [http://www.opkansas.org/wp-content/uploads/downloads/1204-overland-park-traffic-ordinance-including-table-of-contents-and-index.pdf Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MUTCD Requirements: ==&lt;br /&gt;
“Keep Right” (R4-7) Symbol signs may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right-hand side of a roadway feature or obstruction.[[Image:R4-7.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The “Keep Right” sign should be installed as close as practical to approach ends of raised medians, parkways, islands, underpass piers, and at other locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right.  The sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right-hand side of the sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==&lt;br /&gt;
A “Keep Right” sign is to be installed according to the following guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Thoroughfare Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Keep Right” sign should be installed in the median approach nose where the geometry of the street transitions from a non-divided to a divided cross-section.  It is not required to install the “Keep Right” sign in the median nose opposite an intersection where the previous street segment has had a continuous median.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===On Collector or Residential Streets:===&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Keep Right” sign should be installed in the median approach nose in a mid-block location where the geometry of the street transitions from a non-divided to a divided cross-section.  This generally occurs at locations where the median is relatively short in length and is installed as a traffic calming or aesthetic measure.&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Keep Right” sign is not required on the approach ends of the median on collector or residential streets where the median serves as an entry feature into a subdivision unless the configuration of the street is not apparent that traffic must stay to the right of the median.&lt;br /&gt;
#The “Keep Right” sign is not required in locations where a flush-mounted median (Type A curb and gutter section) is used. &lt;br /&gt;
#The “Keep Right” sign is not required to be installed in the approach nose of a splitter island within roundabouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where installed, the sign should be accompanied with and mounted above an “Object Marker” (OM1-3) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signing Standards: ==&lt;br /&gt;
The “Keep Right” (R4-7) sign shall have a black legend and border, on a retro-reflectorized white background and shall be 24” x 30” in size.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:April_Wire&amp;diff=8024</id>
		<title>User talk:April Wire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:April_Wire&amp;diff=8024"/>
		<updated>2014-06-12T19:34:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 14:34, 12 June 2014 (CDT)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:April_Wire&amp;diff=8023</id>
		<title>User:April Wire</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:April_Wire&amp;diff=8023"/>
		<updated>2014-06-12T19:34:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Civil Engineer II for the City of Overland Park working on Traffic Engineering projects.  Grew up in Springfield, MO.  Graduated from the University of Missouri - Rolla with a B.S. in Civil Engineering.  Has a 2 year old daughter.  Lived in Colorado from 2007 to 2014.  Relocated to Kansas City in 2014.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Civil Engineer II for the City of Overland Park working on Traffic Engineering projects.  Grew up in Springfield, MO.  Graduated from the University of Missouri - Rolla with a B.S. in Civil Engineering.  Has a 2 year old daughter.  Lived in Colorado from 2007 to 2014.  Relocated to Kansas City in 2014.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Keith_%22big%22_Diehl&amp;diff=7844</id>
		<title>User talk:Keith &quot;big&quot; Diehl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Keith_%22big%22_Diehl&amp;diff=7844"/>
		<updated>2014-04-25T13:28:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 08:28, 25 April 2014 (CDT)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Keith_%22big%22_Diehl&amp;diff=7843</id>
		<title>User:Keith &quot;big&quot; Diehl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Keith_%22big%22_Diehl&amp;diff=7843"/>
		<updated>2014-04-25T13:28:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Real Deal from IT...  I guess my biography must be at least 50 characters long so I will keep typing on for a bit to be able to eventually setup this account and test the e-mail delivery notifications for the server.  This may still not be enough information so I continue to drone on and type developing a slight bit of carpal tunnel syndrome and pain in my hands and wrists...  :)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Keith_Diehl&amp;diff=7664</id>
		<title>User:Keith Diehl</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Keith_Diehl&amp;diff=7664"/>
		<updated>2014-04-18T21:17:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Blanked the page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5343</id>
		<title>Approved Materials - Streetlighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5343"/>
		<updated>2013-10-01T12:07:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preapproved Materials|&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQLDisclaimer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noautonum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;__TOC__&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Cable ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Wire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Distribution Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pole Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Electrical Service Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Conduit and Fittings ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Fittings ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Service Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Couplings ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fuses ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Splice Kits ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Centers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Grounding Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod Clamp ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Junction and Service Boxes ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type I Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type II Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Lamps ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== High Pressure Sodium ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Luminaires ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Highway Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Residential Post Top ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Photocell ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Photocell ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Poles ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 30&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 40&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 14&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5342</id>
		<title>Approved Materials - Streetlighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5342"/>
		<updated>2013-10-01T12:07:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* = Multi-tap Connectors */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noautonum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;__TOC__&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preapproved Materials|&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQLDisclaimer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Cable ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Wire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Distribution Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pole Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Electrical Service Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Conduit and Fittings ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Fittings ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Service Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Couplings ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-tap Connectors ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fuses ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Splice Kits ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Centers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Grounding Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod Clamp ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Junction and Service Boxes ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type I Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type II Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Lamps ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== High Pressure Sodium ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Luminaires ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Highway Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Residential Post Top ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Photocell ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Photocell ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Poles ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 30&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 40&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 14&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.css&amp;diff=5341</id>
		<title>MediaWiki:Common.css</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=MediaWiki:Common.css&amp;diff=5341"/>
		<updated>2013-10-01T12:06:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;/* CSS placed here will be applied to all skins */&lt;br /&gt;
/* Add the ability to have TOCs without numbers */&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc .tocnumber { display:none; }&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc #toc ul,&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc .toc ul {&lt;br /&gt;
line-height: 1.5em;&lt;br /&gt;
list-style: none;&lt;br /&gt;
margin: .3em 0 0;&lt;br /&gt;
padding: 0;&lt;br /&gt;
.nonumtoc #toc ul ul, .nonumtoc .toc ul ul { margin: 0 0 0 2em; }&lt;br /&gt;
}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* add the .noautonum option */&lt;br /&gt;
.noautonum .tocnumber { display: none; } &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
/* Add the ability to limit TOC levels */&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-2 .toclevel-2 {display:none;}&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-3 .toclevel-3 {display:none;}&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-4 .toclevel-4 {display:none;}&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-5 .toclevel-5 {display:none;}&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-6 .toclevel-6 {display:none;}&lt;br /&gt;
.toclimit-7 .toclevel-7 {display:none;}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5340</id>
		<title>Approved Materials - Streetlighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5340"/>
		<updated>2013-10-01T12:03:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noautonum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;__TOC__&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preapproved Materials|&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQLDisclaimer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Cable ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Wire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Distribution Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pole Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Electrical Service Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Conduit and Fittings ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Fittings ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Service Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Couplings ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-tap Connectors ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fuses ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Splice Kits ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Centers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Grounding Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod Clamp ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Junction and Service Boxes ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type I Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type II Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Lamps ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== High Pressure Sodium ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Luminaires ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Highway Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Residential Post Top ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Photocell ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Photocell ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Poles ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 30&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 40&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 14&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5339</id>
		<title>Approved Materials - Streetlighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5339"/>
		<updated>2013-10-01T12:03:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nonum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;__TOC__&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preapproved Materials|&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQLDisclaimer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Cable ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Wire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Distribution Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pole Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Electrical Service Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Conduit and Fittings ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Fittings ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Service Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Couplings ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-tap Connectors ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fuses ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Splice Kits ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Centers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Grounding Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod Clamp ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Junction and Service Boxes ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type I Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type II Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Lamps ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== High Pressure Sodium ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Luminaires ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Highway Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Residential Post Top ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Photocell ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Photocell ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Poles ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 30&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 40&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 14&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5338</id>
		<title>Approved Materials - Streetlighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting&amp;diff=5338"/>
		<updated>2013-10-01T12:02:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;nonum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;__TOC__&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preapproved Materials|&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Return to Complete Preapproved Materials Page&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQLDisclaimer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{PQL-CSF|TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;noautonum&amp;quot;&amp;gt;__TOC__&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Breakaway Pole Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Break-away Couplings and Bases ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Cable ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Wire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Distribution Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pole Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Electrical Service Cable ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Conduit and Fittings ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== PVC Fittings ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Service Conduit ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== HDPE Couplings ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Connector Kits, Fuse Holders and Fuses ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multi-tap Connectors ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Un-Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fused Fuse Holders ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fuses ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Splice Kits ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Centers ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Four-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Control Centers (Single-Circuit) ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Grounding Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ground Rod Clamp ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Junction and Service Boxes ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type I Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Type II Junction Box ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Lamps ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== High Pressure Sodium ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Luminaires ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Cobra-Head Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Highway Luminaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Residential Post Top ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Photocell ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Photocell ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Poles ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 30&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 40&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Street Light Bracket Arms ===&lt;br /&gt;
=== Aluminum Poles 14&#039; Mounting Heights ===&lt;br /&gt;
== Screw-In Pole Foundations ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Nico_Cantarero&amp;diff=4807</id>
		<title>User talk:Nico Cantarero</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Nico_Cantarero&amp;diff=4807"/>
		<updated>2013-04-10T19:20:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 14:20, 10 April 2013 (CDT)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Nico_Cantarero&amp;diff=4806</id>
		<title>User:Nico Cantarero</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Nico_Cantarero&amp;diff=4806"/>
		<updated>2013-04-10T19:20:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality SpecialistWater Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;br /&gt;
Water Quality Specialist&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Brian_Scovill&amp;diff=4768</id>
		<title>User talk:Brian Scovill</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User_talk:Brian_Scovill&amp;diff=4768"/>
		<updated>2013-02-22T21:27:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Welcome!&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Welcome to &#039;&#039;PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages&#039;&#039;!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
We hope you will contribute much and well.&lt;br /&gt;
You will probably want to read the [[Help:Contents|help pages]].&lt;br /&gt;
Again, welcome and have fun! [[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] ([[User talk:WikiSysop|talk]]) 15:27, 22 February 2013 (CST)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Brian_Scovill&amp;diff=4767</id>
		<title>User:Brian Scovill</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=User:Brian_Scovill&amp;diff=4767"/>
		<updated>2013-02-22T21:27:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Creating user page for new user.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Senior Civil Engineer, City of Overland Park, Public Works Department, Capital Improvements Section.  Senior Civil Engineer, City of Overland Park, Public Works Department, Capital Improvements Section. Senior Civil Engineer, City of Overland Park, Public Works Department, Capital Improvements Section. Senior Civil Engineer, City of Overland Park, Public Works Department, Capital Improvements Section. Senior Civil Engineer, City of Overland Park, Public Works Department, Capital Improvements Section.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Help:Contents&amp;diff=4656</id>
		<title>Help:Contents</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Help:Contents&amp;diff=4656"/>
		<updated>2012-10-04T18:17:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Using MediaWiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Navbar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using MediaWiki ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MediaWiki provides a web space where registered editors can share information and create documents collaboratively. MediaWiki is the wiki engine that supports Wikipedia. The following provides basic editing techniques for the Project Procedures Manual wiki. Additional editing techniques can be found by searching the internet. Be sure to include &amp;quot;MediaWiki&amp;quot; in your search as there are a number of wiki programs. MediaWiki is the open-source wiki software used by http://wikipedia.org, which is perhaps the largest [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Size_comparisonslargest single website] on the earth, and certainly the largest encyclopedia.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|In order for file links to work, you must use Microsoft Internet Explorer, other browsers display content, &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;but won&#039;t open Windows Explorer windows to file links, and won&#039;t run executable programs from the Wiki pages.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You will need to be a registered user to edit content on this Wiki.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;See [[RightsNotice|this page for more information]]}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Searching PPM ==&lt;br /&gt;
The PPM utilizes the Sphinx Search engine. This operates similar to Google, and has advanced query syntax documented [[Sphinx Syntax|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Accessing your MediaWiki site ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You must have cookies enabled to log in to a MediaWiki site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up your userpage ==&lt;br /&gt;
As a wiki user you have your own page where you can add content such as a profile and picture so other users can find out more about you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on your  username at the top-right of the browser window to access your userpage.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the create or edit tab that appears near the top of the browser window.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The page will now appear in edit mode with an editing toolbar at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type a message into the edit area.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;See Adding or changing content (editing) in this guide for further information and editing tips.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button at the bottom of the page, below the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You can also add a link to an image, file or website.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
See [[#Uploading_and_adding_an_image|Adding an image]], [[#Uploading and adding a link to a document|Uploading and adding a link to a document]] and [[#Adding a link to another website|Adding a link to another website]]in this guide for how to perform these actions.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customizing your signature ==&lt;br /&gt;
MediaWiki contains a signature tool that allows you to mark your contributions on the wiki. By default this signature tool, uses your username. Since your username may not be meaningful to other users, it can be changed to your real name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the my preferences link that appears at the top-right of the browser window.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type your preferred name into the Signature field on the preferences page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding or changing content (editing) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Create an account by clicking on the Login/Create Account link (top right)&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the page you wish to edit (using the links in the navigation menu to the left of the window).&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit either a whole page or just a section of a page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a whole page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the edit tab at the top of the window. The page will now appear in edit mode with an editing toolbar at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
#Make your additions or changes in the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Show preview&amp;quot; button to verify your changes without saving.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button below the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit a section of a page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the [edit] link that appears to the right of the window, in line with the heading of the section you wish to edit. The page will now appear in edit mode with an editing toolbar at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
#Make your additions or changes in the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Show preview&amp;quot; button to verify your changes without saving.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button below the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|You must place a blank line between sections of text to force a new paragraph.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use the following when formatting:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a bulleted list, start the line with a asterisk character *.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*If your list is non-contiguous, you can also use the html tags &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; to generate numbered lists.&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a numbered list, start the line with a hash character #.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To highlight important facts or quotes by indenting them, use &#039;:&#039;s.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*To enclose text within a box, start each of the relevant text with a blank space.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a page header ==&lt;br /&gt;
Add the template reference &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{Navbar}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; to transclude the standard page header to your page.&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;800px&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|- bgcolor=&amp;quot;#EBE1C5&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|[[Main Page|Home]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Phase I - Vision|I-Vision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Phase II - Preliminary Design|II-Prelim. Design]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Phase III - Final Design|III-Final Design]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Phase IV - Pre-Construction|IV-Pre-Const.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Phase V - Construction|V-Construction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Phase VI - Retrospect|VI-Retrospect]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{Navbar}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; template also places a table of contents below the navbar whose numbering is suppressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing the color of text ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Go to the page or section you wish to edit (using the links in the navigation menu to the left of the window).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click on either the edit tab at the top of the window to edit the whole page or the [edit] link that appears at the right side of the window next to the heading of the section you wish to edit.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;To change the color of text, you need to use HTML font color tags. The following example shows how to add green text to your page.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=green&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=green&amp;gt;An example of green text&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The spelling of color is in American Language.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click the Save page button below the text area.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing text to computer code (courier) ==&lt;br /&gt;
#Surround the text with &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; An example using code tags&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; appears like this:&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;An example using code tags&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a table ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Go to the page or section you wish to edit (using the links in the navigation menu to the left of the window).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click on either the edit tab at the top of the window to edit the whole page or the [edit] link that appears at the right side of the window next to the heading of the section you wish to edit.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;To add a table, you need to use HTML coding. The following example shows how to add a table of 3 columns and 3 rows with a column width of 150.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Copy and paste the following to produce a table with 3 columns and 3 rows.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{| border=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|-&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|width=&amp;quot;150pt&amp;quot;|Column 1 Heading&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|width=&amp;quot;150pt&amp;quot;|Column 2 Heading&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|width=&amp;quot;150pt&amp;quot;|Column 3 Heading&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|-&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|column 1 row 2 info ||column 2 row 2 info|| column 3 row 2 info&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|-&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|column 1 row 3 info ||column 2 row 3 info|| column 3 row 3 info&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;|}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click the Save page button below the text area.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is how the above coding will appear when you preview or save the page or section:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:::{| border=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;150pt&amp;quot;|Column 1 Heading&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;150pt&amp;quot;|Column 2 Heading&lt;br /&gt;
|width=&amp;quot;150pt&amp;quot;|Column 3 Heading&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|column 1 row 2 info ||column 2 row 2 info|| column 3 row 2 info&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|column 1 row 3 info ||column 2 row 3 info|| column 3 row 3 info&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Signing your posts==&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the steps in Adding or changing content (editing) in this guide to edit either a page or a section, but stop before you click the Save page button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Then, either:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the signature tool  icon in the editing toolbar. A combination of lines and squiggles will appear in the editing area i.e. &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;--~~~~&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:::--[[User:WikiSysop|WikiSysop]] 11:08, 20 January 2010 (UTC)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:::::or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Type in two hyphens followed immediately by four tildes and a HTML line break tag i.e.&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;--~~~~&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button below the text area. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your username and the date and time will appear in place of the lines and squiggles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The username will now appear as a highlighted link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this link will take you to the userpage of that person, or your own userpage. See [[#Setting up your userpage|Setting up your userpage]] in this guide.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Also see [[#Customizing your signature|Customizing your signature]] in this guide for how to change your signature from your username to a preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Uploading and adding an image ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding an image is a two-step process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You first need to upload your file then add a link to it from a page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you have uploaded an image to the wiki previously, you only need to add a link to it from a page -remember though, that you will need to know the exact file name of the image. If you have forgotten the exact name of the file, you can click on [http://pwwiki/wiki/index.php/Special:Upload Upload File] in the toolbox menu to the left of the window (under the navigation menu) and then click on list of uploaded files to view the names of all uploaded files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|It is best to upload only small images, as large images take a long time to load and can be difficult to view. As a rule of thumb, they should be no larger in file size than 100 Kb and no larger in physical size than 640x480 pixels.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload the image:===&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on Upload file in the toolbox menu to the left of the window (under the navigation menu).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Alternatively, you can click on Upload Multiple Files which allows you to select, name, and describe multiple files on one form.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Browse… button next to the Source filename: text box and locate the file you wish to upload and add to a page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Once you have selected the file you need and clicked Open, the file name should appear in the Destination filename: text box. &lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight and copy this field (Ctrl+C) so you can paste the exact name of the uploaded file into the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you wish, type a description of the image in the Summary field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Upload file button. You will be redirected to the Image homepage for your newly uploaded image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add a link to the image:===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Go to the page or section where you would like to add the image and click on the edit tab (at the top of the window) or the [edit] link (at the far right of the page near the section heading).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Place the cursor where you would like the image to appear.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click on the Embedded image  icon in the middle of the editing tool bar.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Change the file name in the file tag to reflect the exact name of the image you just uploaded (you can paste the name over the top of the current text Example.jpg by using Ctrl+V).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note: In addition to the filename you can specify the desired location of the image on the page, the image width and a caption that describes the image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::The basic syntax is: &lt;br /&gt;
:::&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[File:filename|image type|image location|image width|Caption]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:::e.g &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[File:Pwlogo_150px.png|thumb|right|50px|PW Logo]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;[[File:Pwlogo150px.png|thumb|right|50px|PW Logo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::*image type can be thumb or frame&lt;br /&gt;
::*image location can be left, right, center (note American spelling) or none&lt;br /&gt;
::*image width: e.g. 250px or you can specify size instead 100x200px&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click the Save page button below the text area.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uploading and adding a link to a document==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding a document such as a PDF, Word document or Excel spreadsheet is a two-step process. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You first need to upload your file then add a link to it from a page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|If you have uploaded a document to the wiki previously, you only need to add a link to it from a page -remember though, that you will need to know the exact file name of the document. If you have forgotten the exact name of the file, you can click on Upload file in the toolbox menu to the left of the window (under the navigation menu) and then click on list of uploaded files to view the names of all uploaded files.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Upload the document:===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on Upload file in the toolbox menu to the left of the window (under the navigation menu).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Browse… button next to the Source filename: text box and locate the file you wish to upload and add to a page. Once you have selected the file you need and clicked Open, the file name should appear in the Destination filename: field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Copy this field (Ctrl+C) so you can paste the exact name of the uploaded file into the page.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you wish, type a description of the image in the Summary field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Upload file button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Add a link to the document:===&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the page or section where you would like to add a link to the document and click on the edit tab (at the top of the window) or the [edit] link (at the far right of the page near the section heading).&lt;br /&gt;
#Place the cursor where you would like the link to the document to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Media file   icon in the middle of the editing tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change the file name in the media tag to reflect the name of the file you just uploaded (you can paste the name over the top of the current text Example.ogg using Ctrl+V).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can customise this link so that a more meaningful name appears as the link to the file. To do this insert a pipe symbol i.e. | after the file name e.g. qg_mediawiki_users.pdf and type in the preferred file name e.g. Quick guide for MediaWiki users e.g: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Media:qg_mediawi_users.pdf|Quick guide for MediaWiki users]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Save page button below the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a link to another website==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Go to the page or section where you would like to add a link to an external site and click on the edit tab (at the top of the window) or the [edit] link (at the far right of the page near the section heading).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Place the cursor in the location where you would like the link to appear.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click on the External link  icon in the editing toolbar, or type the URL directly into the page.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Note that if you surround the URL with single square brackets, you can add alternative text, without the square brackets, the link appears as typed.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;A URL tag e.g. [http://www.example.com link title] will have been inserted into the text area where you placed your cursor.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Replace the web address e.g. http://www.example.com with your link&#039;s URL e.g. http://www.stormwatch.com&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Replace the words link title with the link description you wish to appear on the page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; e.g.[http://www.stormwatch.com Stormwatch] i.e: &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[http://www.stormwatch.com Stormwatch]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click the Save page button below the text area.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a new page==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Go to the page or section where you would like to add a link to a new page and click on the edit tab (at the top of the window) or the [edit] link (at the far right of the page near the section heading).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Then either:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select and highlight a word or collection of words that represents the title of your new page and click on the Internal link  icon in the editing toolbar. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The words you selected will appear surrounded by two sets of square brackets and will have been formatted as a link to your new page, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:::::or&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li value=2&amp;gt;Click on the Internal link  icon in the editing toolbar.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Between the two sets of square brackets replace the words link title with the title of your new page e.g.&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[FAQs]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click the Save page button below the text area.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click on the hyperlink you have created in the text, which will be in a different coloured type. This will take you to a new blank page with the same name as the hyperlink.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Type into the text box and format as required.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Click the Save page button below the text area.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dividing a page into sections==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the page or section you would like to divide and click on the edit tab (at the top of the window) or the [edit] link (at the far right of the page near the section heading).&lt;br /&gt;
#Place the cursor where you would like to divide the text and type in your heading e.g. Topic 1&lt;br /&gt;
#Select and highlight the heading text, then click the Level 2 headline  icon in the middle of the editing toolbar. Two &#039;equals&#039; characters will appear around the text you selected as your heading&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; e.g. == Topic 1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button below the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note| If you add four or more headings to a page, a table of contents will automatically appear at the top.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The =&#039;s must be the first characters in the line.&lt;br /&gt;
*By clicking the &amp;lt;font color=blue&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[edit]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt; link at the side of each section, you can edit just that section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restoring previous content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the page or section where you wish to restore previous content.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the history tab at the top of the window. &lt;br /&gt;
#You will see a chronological list of all the changes that have been made to that page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the date and time link of the version you wish to restore. You will see the old version of the page with links at the top to take you to an even older version or to a newer version.&lt;br /&gt;
#If you are sure this is the version you wish to restore, click on the edit tab at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see a warning at the top of the page that you are editing an out-of-date revision. Click on Save page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finding out who edited the page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To identify who made which contributions to a particular page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the relevant page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the history tab at the top of the window. &lt;br /&gt;
#A chronological list of all the changes to the page will appear, with the editors&#039; usernames next to their changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the circle next to a particular version and click Compare selected versions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will see the changes made in that version in yellow to the left of the window, and later changes to those sections in green to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see a particular user&#039;s contributions to the whole site:&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on Special pages in the toolbox menu (under the navigation menu to the left of the window).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on User contributions under the heading of Users and rights.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the relevant username and click Search.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see a chronological list of all of the changes that person has made.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on diff next to a particular version to see the changes made to that version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a category==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categories are groups of wiki pages that share a common theme. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Category pages list all wiki pages that are included in that category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a category page entitled Big Cats might contain a link to a page called Lions and another called Tigers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Categories allow users to browse content on a wiki using themes rather than searching for keywords or navigating links via the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to the page or section you would like to add the new category and click on the edit tab (at the top of the window).&lt;br /&gt;
#Scroll to the bottom of the page and type in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[Category:Your category name]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the last new line.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button. Your page will now have a blue box at the bottom containing the category details.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the link to your new category to access the category page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have created a category and accessed your category page, instead of having an article tab, the content of the page is displayed on a Category tab. &lt;br /&gt;
This tab is a place for you to define your Category.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the edit tab (at the top of the window).&lt;br /&gt;
#Type in the description of the category.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the Save page button below the text area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|Top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reviewing all of the categories==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view all categories, &lt;br /&gt;
#click on Special pages in the toolbox menu (under the navigation menu to the left of the window).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on Categories in the list under the heading of List of pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of categories will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Inserting Templates==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Templates are special wiki pages that can be used to highlight information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{Exhibit|FileName|Exhibit Number|Description}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to insert a formatted link to an exhibit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;For example:&#039;&#039;&#039; inserting &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{Exhibit|II-3-4b.dot|No. II-3-4b|City’s standard Engineering / Architectural services agreement for design projects.}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; produces:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|II-3-4b.dot|No. II-3-4b|City’s standard Engineering / Architectural services agreement for design projects.}}&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{update}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to add {{update}} to any wiki page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{brokenlinks}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to add {{brokenlinks}} and be sure to remove this code after the page has been fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;{{Note|This is an example note}}&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to add a highlighted note to any wiki page. {{Note|This is an example note}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create text that appears if you hover the mousepointer over a {{H:texttip|word that will be underlined with dots like this one|word}} use [[Template:H:texttip]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another tooltip type template that uses the ParserExtensions extension is [[Template:H:title]] - it allows links and turning the dotted line off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#Top|top]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Web Help ==&lt;br /&gt;
[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Help:Wiki_markup Help:Wiki markup]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Sphinx_Syntax&amp;diff=4655</id>
		<title>Sphinx Syntax</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Sphinx_Syntax&amp;diff=4655"/>
		<updated>2012-10-04T18:15:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The following special operators and modifiers can be used when using the extended matching mode:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;operator OR:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
hello | world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;operator NOT:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
hello -world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
hello !world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;field search operator:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@title hello @body world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;field position limit modifier (introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@body[50] hello&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;multiple-field search operator:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@(title,body) hello world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;all-field search operator:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@* hello&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;phrase search operator:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;proximity search operator:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot;~10&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;quorum matching operator:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;the world is a wonderful place&amp;quot;/3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;strict order operator (aka operator &amp;quot;before&amp;quot;):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
aaa &amp;lt;&amp;lt; bbb &amp;lt;&amp;lt; ccc&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;exact form modifier (introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
raining =cats and =dogs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;field-start and field-end modifier (introduced in version 0.9.9-rc2):&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
^hello world$&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Here&#039;s an example query that uses some of these operators:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Example 5.2. Extended matching mode: query example&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot; @title &amp;quot;example program&amp;quot;~5 @body python -(php|perl) @* code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The full meaning of this search is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find the words &#039;hello&#039; and &#039;world&#039; adjacently in any field in a document;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the same document must also contain the words &#039;example&#039; and &#039;program&#039; in the title field, with up to, but not including, 10 words between the words in question; (E.g. &amp;quot;example PHP program&amp;quot; would be matched however &amp;quot;example script to introduce outside data into the correct context for your program&amp;quot; would not because two terms have 10 or more words between them)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the same document must contain the word &#039;python&#039; in the body field, but not contain either &#039;php&#039; or &#039;perl&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the same document must contain the word &#039;code&#039; in any field.&lt;br /&gt;
There always is implicit AND operator, so &amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot; means that both &amp;quot;hello&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;world&amp;quot; must be present in matching document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR operator precedence is higher than AND, so &amp;quot;looking for cat | dog | mouse&amp;quot; means &amp;quot;looking for ( cat | dog | mouse )&amp;quot; and not &amp;quot;(looking for cat) | dog | mouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field limit operator limits subsequent searching to a given field. Normally, query will fail with an error message if given field name does not exist in the searched index. However, that can be suppressed by specifying &amp;quot;@@relaxed&amp;quot; option at the very beginning of the query:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@@relaxed @nosuchfield my query&lt;br /&gt;
This can be helpful when searching through heterogeneous indexes with different schemas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field position limit, introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1, additionaly restricts the searching to first N position within given field (or fields). For example, &amp;quot;@body[50] hello&amp;quot; will not match the documents where the keyword &#039;hello&#039; occurs at position 51 and below in the body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Proximity distance is specified in words, adjusted for word count, and applies to all words within quotes. For instance, &amp;quot;cat dog mouse&amp;quot;~5 query means that there must be less than 8-word span which contains all 3 words, ie. &amp;quot;CAT aaa bbb ccc DOG eee fff MOUSE&amp;quot; document will not match this query, because this span is exactly 8 words long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quorum matching operator introduces a kind of fuzzy matching. It will only match those documents that pass a given threshold of given words. The example above (&amp;quot;the world is a wonderful place&amp;quot;/3) will match all documents that have at least 3 of the 6 specified words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strict order operator (aka operator &amp;quot;before&amp;quot;), introduced in version 0.9.9-rc2, will match the document only if its argument keywords occur in the document exactly in the query order. For instance, &amp;quot;black &amp;lt;&amp;lt; cat&amp;quot; query (without quotes) will match the document &amp;quot;black and white cat&amp;quot; but not the &amp;quot;that cat was black&amp;quot; document. Order operator has the lowest priority. It can be applied both to just keywords and more complex expressions, ie. this is a valid query:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(bag of words) &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;exact phrase&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; red|green|blue&lt;br /&gt;
Exact form keyword modifier, introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1, will match the document only if the keyword occurred in exactly the specified form. The default behaviour is to match the document if the stemmed keyword matches. For instance, &amp;quot;runs&amp;quot; query will match both the document that contains &amp;quot;runs&amp;quot; and the document that contains &amp;quot;running&amp;quot;, because both forms stem to just &amp;quot;run&amp;quot; - while &amp;quot;=runs&amp;quot; query will only match the first document. Exact form operator requires index_exact_words option to be enabled. This is a modifier that affects the keyword and thus can be used within operators such as phrase, proximity, and quorum operators.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field-start and field-end keyword modifiers, introduced in version 0.9.9-rc2, will make the keyword match only if it occurred at the very start or the very end of a fulltext field, respectively. For instance, the query &amp;quot;^hello world$&amp;quot; (with quotes and thus combining phrase operator and start/end modifiers) will only match documents that contain at least one field that has exactly these two keywords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with 0.9.9-rc1, arbitrarily nested brackets and negations are allowed. However, the query must be possible to compute without involving an implicit list of all documents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// correct query&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
aaa -(bbb -(ccc ddd))&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// queries that are non-computable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
-aaa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
aaa | -bbb&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Sphinx_Syntax&amp;diff=4654</id>
		<title>Sphinx Syntax</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Sphinx_Syntax&amp;diff=4654"/>
		<updated>2012-10-04T17:59:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;The following special operators and modifiers can be used when using the extended matching mode:  operator OR:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; hello | world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; operator NOT:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; hello -world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; hello !...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The following special operators and modifiers can be used when using the extended matching mode:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
operator OR:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
hello | world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
operator NOT:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
hello -world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
hello !world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
field search operator:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@title hello @body world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
field position limit modifier (introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@body[50] hello&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
multiple-field search operator:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@(title,body) hello world&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
all-field search operator:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
@* hello&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
phrase search operator:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
proximity search operator:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot;~10&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
quorum matching operator:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;the world is a wonderful place&amp;quot;/3&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
strict order operator (aka operator &amp;quot;before&amp;quot;):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
aaa &amp;lt;&amp;lt; bbb &amp;lt;&amp;lt; ccc&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
exact form modifier (introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
raining =cats and =dogs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
field-start and field-end modifier (introduced in version 0.9.9-rc2):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
^hello world$&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here&#039;s an example query that uses some of these operators:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example 5.2. Extended matching mode: query example&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot; @title &amp;quot;example program&amp;quot;~5 @body python -(php|perl) @* code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The full meaning of this search is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find the words &#039;hello&#039; and &#039;world&#039; adjacently in any field in a document;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the same document must also contain the words &#039;example&#039; and &#039;program&#039; in the title field, with up to, but not including, 10 words between the words in question; (E.g. &amp;quot;example PHP program&amp;quot; would be matched however &amp;quot;example script to introduce outside data into the correct context for your program&amp;quot; would not because two terms have 10 or more words between them)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the same document must contain the word &#039;python&#039; in the body field, but not contain either &#039;php&#039; or &#039;perl&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, the same document must contain the word &#039;code&#039; in any field.&lt;br /&gt;
There always is implicit AND operator, so &amp;quot;hello world&amp;quot; means that both &amp;quot;hello&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;world&amp;quot; must be present in matching document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR operator precedence is higher than AND, so &amp;quot;looking for cat | dog | mouse&amp;quot; means &amp;quot;looking for ( cat | dog | mouse )&amp;quot; and not &amp;quot;(looking for cat) | dog | mouse&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field limit operator limits subsequent searching to a given field. Normally, query will fail with an error message if given field name does not exist in the searched index. However, that can be suppressed by specifying &amp;quot;@@relaxed&amp;quot; option at the very beginning of the query:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
@@relaxed @nosuchfield my query&lt;br /&gt;
This can be helpful when searching through heterogeneous indexes with different schemas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field position limit, introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1, additionaly restricts the searching to first N position within given field (or fields). For example, &amp;quot;@body[50] hello&amp;quot; will not match the documents where the keyword &#039;hello&#039; occurs at position 51 and below in the body.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Proximity distance is specified in words, adjusted for word count, and applies to all words within quotes. For instance, &amp;quot;cat dog mouse&amp;quot;~5 query means that there must be less than 8-word span which contains all 3 words, ie. &amp;quot;CAT aaa bbb ccc DOG eee fff MOUSE&amp;quot; document will not match this query, because this span is exactly 8 words long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quorum matching operator introduces a kind of fuzzy matching. It will only match those documents that pass a given threshold of given words. The example above (&amp;quot;the world is a wonderful place&amp;quot;/3) will match all documents that have at least 3 of the 6 specified words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Strict order operator (aka operator &amp;quot;before&amp;quot;), introduced in version 0.9.9-rc2, will match the document only if its argument keywords occur in the document exactly in the query order. For instance, &amp;quot;black &amp;lt;&amp;lt; cat&amp;quot; query (without quotes) will match the document &amp;quot;black and white cat&amp;quot; but not the &amp;quot;that cat was black&amp;quot; document. Order operator has the lowest priority. It can be applied both to just keywords and more complex expressions, ie. this is a valid query:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(bag of words) &amp;lt;&amp;lt; &amp;quot;exact phrase&amp;quot; &amp;lt;&amp;lt; red|green|blue&lt;br /&gt;
Exact form keyword modifier, introduced in version 0.9.9-rc1, will match the document only if the keyword occurred in exactly the specified form. The default behaviour is to match the document if the stemmed keyword matches. For instance, &amp;quot;runs&amp;quot; query will match both the document that contains &amp;quot;runs&amp;quot; and the document that contains &amp;quot;running&amp;quot;, because both forms stem to just &amp;quot;run&amp;quot; - while &amp;quot;=runs&amp;quot; query will only match the first document. Exact form operator requires index_exact_words option to be enabled. This is a modifier that affects the keyword and thus can be used within operators such as phrase, proximity, and quorum operators.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field-start and field-end keyword modifiers, introduced in version 0.9.9-rc2, will make the keyword match only if it occurred at the very start or the very end of a fulltext field, respectively. For instance, the query &amp;quot;^hello world$&amp;quot; (with quotes and thus combining phrase operator and start/end modifiers) will only match documents that contain at least one field that has exactly these two keywords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with 0.9.9-rc1, arbitrarily nested brackets and negations are allowed. However, the query must be possible to compute without involving an implicit list of all documents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// correct query&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
aaa -(bbb -(ccc ddd))&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
// queries that are non-computable&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
-aaa&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
aaa | -bbb&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Template:LPA_citation&amp;diff=4638</id>
		<title>Template:LPA citation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Template:LPA_citation&amp;diff=4638"/>
		<updated>2012-09-21T19:42:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;refer to Section {{{1}}}, Chapter {{{2}}} of KDOT&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;LPA Project Development Manual&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Usage:&lt;br /&gt;
*1 - Section number (e.g. 2.3.4.5)&lt;br /&gt;
*2 - Chapter number (e.g. 2.0 Programming)&lt;br /&gt;
*    Links can be added in either section as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Phase_V_-_Construction&amp;diff=4637</id>
		<title>Phase V - Construction</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Phase_V_-_Construction&amp;diff=4637"/>
		<updated>2012-09-21T19:39:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Task No. 16 - On-Going Construction Administration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Navbar}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Introduction&lt;br /&gt;
|The construction phase of projects is very visible and generally there are travel/inconveniences and neighborhood disruptions. For this reason, it is the most important phase for City staff and Consultants to plan for the least possible construction time period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A partnering or the team approach usually is recommended. The Contractor, utility companies, City staff and Consultant all work as a team to construct the project. The tasks in this and previous phases facilitates this partnering process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to have a successful project, the following must occur:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Contract documents executed promptly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Discuss/resolve relevant issues/problems at the pre-construction conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Review/approve shop drawings within the promised time period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Pay the Contractor promptly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Provide adequate inspection resources in order not to delay the Contractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Notify the Contractor if the submitted schedule is not maintained. Schedule bi-weekly meetings, if necessary, to keep the project on schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== [[Checklist Phase V|Phase V Checklist]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
== [[Phase V Flow Chart|Flow Chart]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 1 - Prepare for Temporary Financing ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Law Department will prepare the documents for providing project temporary financing when required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 2 - Submit Agency Cash Flow Projection ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to &#039;&#039;&#039;Notice to Proceed&#039;&#039;&#039;, the Project Manager shall submit to the project funding agencies, if required, a project cash flow projection on their standard forms. Currently, Johnson County CARS and KDOT do not require a cash flow projection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/images/V-2.xlt Exhibit No. V-2]&#039;&#039;&#039; is Johnson County SMAC cash flow form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 3 - Submit Cash Flow Projection to City Finance Department ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to &#039;&#039;&#039;Notice to Proceed&#039;&#039;&#039;, the Project Manager shall submit a cash flow for the project (update if applicable) to the City Finance Department.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._6_-_Submit_Cash_Flow_Projections_.28Engineering_Cost.29|&#039;&#039;&#039;Phase II, Task No. 6&#039;&#039;&#039;]] for standard cash flow form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 4 - Distribute Executed Contract Documents ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eight (8) copies of the Contract Documents need to be prepared for the Contractor’s execution.  The Agreement, Performance Bond, Maintenance Bond, Statutory Bond and/or Labor and Material Payment Bond, and Appointment of Service Agent are partially filled out by the Contract Specialist and provided to the Contractor for execution.  The Appointment of Service Agent is not required if the Contractor’s business is located in the state of Kansas or if the Contractor is located outside of Kansas but is on file and in good standing with the State.  The Contract Specialist will obtain this information through the Kansas Secretary of State’s office.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Contractor is given ten (10) days to execute their part of the Contract Documents.  The Contractor must have all insurance certificates, bonds and Appointment of Service Agent filled out, sealed, with Power of Attorneys attached.  The Contract Specialist will review the insurance certificates to ensure compliance with the requirements set forth in the Instructions to Bidders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After review by the Contract Specialist, the Contract Documents are submitted to the Law Department for review and &amp;quot;approval as to form.&amp;quot;  After Law Department review, they are submitted to the City Clerk&#039;s office for signature by the Mayor and attestation by the City Clerk.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-4a.dot|No. V-4a| is a sample transmittal letter to KDOT}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-4b Sample Transmittal Letter to Contractor.docx|No. V-4b| is a sample transmittal letter to the Contractor}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon return of the signed copies by the City Clerk, two fully executed sets are given to the Contractor (one of which is to be forwarded to the Contractor’s surety company), one is given to the consultant, one is kept in the Public Works file, and one goes to the City Clerk with the award/reject letters.  The remaining sets are provided to various other agencies as needed (i.e.: for CARS projects the City must submit to the Johnson County Director of Infrastructure, one copy of the executed Contract Documents and a half size set of signed and sealed Construction Plans along with a cd containing a .pdf version of the executed Contract Documents and .tiff images of the construction plans.)  The County also requires a list of CARS non-participating items with the transmittal.  The City must also request and receive a &amp;quot;Notice to Proceed&amp;quot; from the Johnson County Director of Infrastructure before initiating construction on a project.&lt;br /&gt;
For a letter detailing the CARS requirements see [[media:III-7a.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;Exhibit No. III-7a&#039;&#039;&#039;.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-4c.dot|No. V-4c| is a sample Contract Document and Plans transmittal letter to CARS with request for &amp;quot;Notice to Proceed&amp;quot;}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-4d.dot|No. V-4d| is a distribution list of agencies and personnel that are to receive executed Contract Documents and Final Plans}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to issuing Notice to Proceed, the Contract Specialist will request from the contractor copies of all DBE subcontracts and at least one randomly selected non-DBE subcontract. The Contract Specialist will verify that each of these subcontracts contain FHWA 1273 documents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-4e.dot|No. V-4e|is a sample transmittal letter to prime contractor requesting a copy of each signed DBE subcontract.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT see [[Media:II-14.xlt|&#039;&#039;&#039;Exhibit No. II-14&#039;&#039;&#039;]].  The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 5 - Complete Sales Tax Exemption Forms ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Contract Specialist will get a sales tax exemption number from the Kansas Department of Revenue for the Contractor&#039;s use when purchasing materials for all projects.  The request will be made on-line at &#039;&#039;&#039;https://www.kdor.org/TaxCenter&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-5a.pdf|No. V-5a| - new requirements as of 8-1-06 for submitting Request for Projects Exemption Certificates. (State of Kansas)}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-5b.pdf|No. V-5b| - is a sample transmittal letter from the Division of Taxation with Exemption Certificate}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-5c Sample Transmittal to Contractor with Tax Exemption Certificate.docx|No. V-5c|is a sample transmittal letter to the contractor regarding Exemption Certificate}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 6 - Complete Material Testing Contracts ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Project Manager shall evaluate the proposals received resulting from [[Phase_IV_-_Pre-Construction#Task_No._2_-_Selection_of_Material_Testing_Firm|&#039;&#039;&#039;Phase IV, Task No. 2&#039;&#039;&#039;]]. The firm with the lowest responsible and qualified proposal will be contacted and advised that their proposal has been accepted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/images/V-6a.dot Exhibit No. V-6a]&#039;&#039;&#039; is a sample letter to selected material testing lab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/images/V-6b.dot Exhibit No. V-6b]&#039;&#039;&#039; is a sample letter to material testing lab not selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The director of Public Works is authorized to sign contracts up to $10,000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City Manager is authorized to sign contracts between $10,000 and $50,000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City Council must approve all contracts exceeding $50,000.  Refer to &#039;&#039;&#039;[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/images/COP247.pdf COP 247]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 7 - Schedule Pre-Construction Conference/Project Sign Confirmation ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subsequent to distributing executed contract documents and prior to issuing Notice to Proceed, the Project Manager will schedule a pre-construction conference. Meeting minutes will be distributed to those in attendance at a later date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|In an effort to avoid scheduling conflicts with other called utility meetings an Outlook calendar has been created called PW Utilities. PW Utilities shall be invited as an attendee to all utility meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meeting requesting utility company attendance.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the items that should be covered during the conference are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*review the plans, special provisions and specifications for the project; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*meet the Contractor’s assigned Superintendent; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*meet the Sub-Contractor(s); &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*receive/discuss the Contractor’s schedule; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*confirm City’s payment schedule;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*status report/confirmation of utility relocations; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*review/presentation of City’s pre-construction checklist; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*answer contractor questions; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*distribute contractors submittal checklist (see exhibit below) and review requirements; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*distribute &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Preapproved_Materials|Approved Materials List]]&#039;&#039;&#039;; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*determine if a City Field Building Permit is required by the Contractor; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*introduce and distribute information for  Excellence in Construction, Contractor Evaluation System, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*remind all contractors that they must comply with all Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) requirements. For KDOT projects the Contractor&#039;s current EEO policy must be on file with KDOT. For EEO compliance resource see KDOT&#039;s &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[http://www.ksdot.org/offChiefCoun/CivilRights/pdf/EEOContractComplianceManual.pdf Contractors EEO Compliance Manual]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7a contractor submittal checklist.xlsx|No. V-7a| is a contractors submittal checklist}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7b.dot|No. V-7b| is an Excellence in Construction information document}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7c.xlsx|No. V-7c| is an Excellence in Construction evaluation form (Attachment &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;)}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|II-7e.dot|No. II-7e| is a meeting sign in sheet}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7d.dot|No. V-7d| is a sample pre-construction invitation attendance letter}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7e pre-construction agenda.docx|No. V-7e| is a sample pre-construction agenda}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7f.pdf|No. V-7f| is the City’s standard pre-construction meeting checklist}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7g.pdf|No. V-7g| is a sample of a City’s Field Building Permit for electrical work}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7h.pdf|No. V-7h| is a Contractor&#039;s Certification Form for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
The following persons/firms will be invited to attend this conference.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Director of Public Works, &lt;br /&gt;
:*City Engineer/City Traffic Engineer,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Manager, Maintenance Operations,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Maintenance Supervisors,&lt;br /&gt;
:*Traffic Maintenance Locate Representitive, &lt;br /&gt;
:*Contractor’s representative and project Superintendent/Sub-Contractors, &lt;br /&gt;
:*Utility company representatives, &lt;br /&gt;
:*Project team members, &lt;br /&gt;
:*Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Plan Reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
:*Project Engineer/Consultant, &lt;br /&gt;
:*SMAC, &lt;br /&gt;
:*CARS, &lt;br /&gt;
:*KDOT (if applicable), and &lt;br /&gt;
:*Material testing laboratory. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When KDOT administers the project, an LPA Preconstruction Conference will be held.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7i.pdf|No. V-7i| is a LPA Preconstruction Conference guidelines}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: An address must be established for each streetlight control center and traffic signal location for KCPL billing and reference purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before construction begins on any CARS or SMAC project, the City must erect a sign in the immediate vicinity of the project identifying it as a CARS or SMAC program project.  However, if the project has Federal funding in addition to CARS or SMAC, the project sign is not to be erected.  The sign specifications will be furnished to the City by the County upon request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 8 - Complete Contractor Permits ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Distribute SWPPP Notebook to Contractor, review requirements and obtain signature for Contractor Certification Form (included in the SWPPP).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Distribute Contractor&#039;s Certification Form for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Project Manager will coordinate with Stormwater Section for LDP application process. See [http://www.opkansas.org/Documents-and-Forms/Detail/Land-Disturbance-Site-Development-Permit-Application &#039;&#039;&#039;Land Disturbance Permit Application&#039;&#039;&#039;].  See sample of [[media:LDP Example.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;City&#039;s Land Disturbance Permit&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Direct the Contractor to obtain a Right-of-Way Permit from the City. Download [http://www.opkansas.org/Documents-and-Forms/Detail/Right-of-Way-Permit-Application &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-of-Way Permit Application&#039;&#039;&#039;] from City&#039;s website. The Right-of-Way permit exempts the roadway contractors working for the City from the restrictions placed on them by the noise ordinance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 9 - Send Information Letter to Residents. Schedule 4th Public Information Meeting. ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Project Contractor has been confirmed (Contract executed), the Project Manager shall schedule the 4th Public Information meeting. The primary purpose of this meeting is to introduce the Contractor’s employees who will be involved in the project and discuss the schedule. The Contractor’s representative should explain how the project is to be constructed, access to property during construction, who to contact (Contractor’s employees) during the normal work day and during the night and weekends. The importance of safety during the project construction time period will be stressed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in [http://www.kssos.org/pubs/pubs_kansas_register.asp Kansas Register] and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net The Legal Record].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
See &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._15_-_Schedule_First_Public_Information_Meeting|Phase II, Task No. 15]]&#039;&#039;&#039; for list of invitees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-9a public meeting invitation.docx|No. V-9a| is an example Invitation Letter to property owners (open house format).}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-9b public meeting notice.pdf|No. V-9b| is an example Notice of Public Information Meeting.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-9c.dot|No. V-9c| is an example Public Information Meeting agenda. An agenda is used for formal presentation public meetings.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|II-34b.dot|No. II-34b| is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible.  [http://www.ksdot.org:9080/burTransPlan/pubtrans/Title%20VI%20Brochure%20-%20English.asp&#039;&#039;&#039;Title VI Brochure&#039;&#039;&#039;] regarding equal opportunity contracting are to be made available at all public meetings.&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 10 - Issue Notice to Proceed ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the Contract Documents have been fully executed and the Pre-Construction meeting has been held, the Consultant/Project Manager shall issue the &#039;&#039;&#039;Notice to Proceed&#039;&#039;&#039;.  This notice shall state the date the work is to begin, intermediate completion dates if applicable, and the date the work is to be completed.  The Notice to Proceed shall not be issued prior to the Pre-Construction meeting.  For KDOT projects, a copy of the Notice to Proceed is to be forwarded to the District One office, the Kansas City Metro office and BLP. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the Contract Specialist will request and receive from the Contractor copies of all DBE subcontracts and at least one randomly selected non-DBE subcontract.  The Contract Specialist will verify that each of these subcontracts contain &#039;&#039;&#039;FHWA 1273&#039;&#039;&#039; documents. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For CARS projects, the City must request and receive a Notice to Proceed from the Johnson County Director of Infrastructure before initiating construction on a project.   See &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Phase_V_-_Construction#Task_No._4_-_Distribute_Executed_Contract_Documents|Phase V, Task No.4]]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-10 notice to proceed.docx|No. V-10|is a sample &#039;&#039;&#039;Notice to Proceed&#039;&#039;&#039; to the contractor.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this time project photos should begin.  The project photos should include &amp;quot;before&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;during&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;after&amp;quot; shots of significant work areas and items.  To best depict progress the photos should be taken from the same vantage points throughout construction.  Example project photos [[media:Project photos.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;Metcalf Avenue at 115th Street  looking north&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
This task shall be performed by the City staff independent of contract requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 11 - Complete Submittals Review ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall assign personnel to review Contractor submittals. The objective is to respond to these submittals within 7 calendar days if a City designed project and 14 calendar days if a Consultant designed project.  The submittal checklist is to be updated as submittals are reviewed and approved.  It is very important that material certifications and mix designs be received and approved prior to placement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than the Contractor submitting catalog cuts for items on the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Preapproved_Materials|Approved Materials List]]&#039;&#039;&#039;, they can complete the [[media:Contract Submittal Forms.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;Project Submittal Forms&#039;&#039;&#039;]]. The City or Consulting Engineer will review the forms against the approved list.  Items which are not on the approved list will need to be submitted with catalog cuts, sample of product and specifications for review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7a contractor submittal checklist.xlsx|No. V-7a|is a contractor submittals checklist.}} &lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-11a.dot|No. V-11a|is a storm sewer structure shop drawing checklist.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-11b.dot|No. V-11b|is a copy of the City&#039;s Concrete Mix Design Requirements with approval letter (for non-KCMMB mixes).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-11c.dot|No. V-11c|is a transmittal letter to the contractor for completed submittals review.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 12 - On-Going Inspections ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Project Inspector will be identified/assigned early in the preliminary design process and will be a member of the City Project Team.  Other inspectors may be assigned to the project on a full or part time basis depending upon the construction activity occurring. An inspector may be assigned to more than one project. The inspector(s) shall keep a daily journal/log for each project. This journal/log shall record the temperature, weather, contractor activities, material testing performed, utility relocation information, contact with citizens, visitors to the site, and any important daily communication between the Contractor’s Superintendent and the inspector(s).  Excellence in Construction, Contractor  Evaluation shall also be tracked throughout construction.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If applicable:&lt;br /&gt;
*see [[media:V-12 Electrical Service Permit Procedures for Streetlighting Controllers or Traffic Signal Constrollers.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;Electrical Service Permit Procedures for Street Lighting Controllers or Traffic Signals Controllers.&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[media:Commercial_Building_Permit_Application.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;Commercial Building Permit Application&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[media:Inspection_Record_and_fax_transmittal_-_Construction_-_Task_12.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;sample Inspection Record and fax transmittal&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[media:Blank Inspection Record Form.dot|&#039;&#039;&#039;Blank Inspection Record Form&#039;&#039;&#039;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to [[media:ESC PW Process.doc|&#039;&#039;&#039;Land Disturbance Permit and Erosion and Sediment Control Process&#039;&#039;&#039;]] as it pertains to initial installation and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures, the SWPPP notebook, and ongoing inspection of control measures throughout construction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|On KDOT projects the assigned inspector(s) will be KDOT Certified Inspector(s).}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The inspector(s) shall create and maintain the field books in accordance with [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/Connections/ConstManual/documentationtindex.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT&#039;s Documentation Manual&#039;&#039;&#039;].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are sections for each type of work that provide examples on how the books are to be organized. The pages in the field book shall be numbered and any mistakes/erroneous entries shall be clearly marked and initialed. &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;font color=magenta&amp;gt;Never erase anything in a field book.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; All inspectors that make entries into the field books must sign and initial on the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The checklists for various types of work are available under the [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/Connections/ConstManual/checklistindex.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;Construction Checklist&#039;&#039;&#039;] link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-12a.xlsx|No. V-12a|is a copy of the City&#039;s Daily Inspection Report (excel format).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-12b.dot|No. V-12b|is a copy of the City&#039;s Daily Inspection Report in (word format).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-12c.xlt|No. V-12c|is a copy of the City&#039;s Concrete Inspection Requirements.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-12d.dot|No. V-12d|is a copy of the City&#039;s Summary of Cold Weather Concrete Procedures (11/22/00).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-12e.xlt|No. V-12e|is a copy of the City&#039;s Sidewalk Ramp Inspection Form.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|ESC Initial Inspection Form.doc|No. V-12f|is a copy of the City&#039;s Initial Erosion and Sediment Inspection Form.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|ESC Weekly Inspection Form, Amendments and Checklist.xls|No. V-12g|is a copy of the City&#039;s Weekly Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Report Forms, Amendments Log and BMP Inspection Checklist. Contractor may use their own inspection forms, subject to review and approval by the Project Team.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|ESC Quality Assurance Form.doc|No. V-12h|is a copy of the City&#039;s Erosion and Sediment Control Quality Assurance Form.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|ESC Final Inspection Form.doc|No. V-12i|is a copy of the City&#039;s Erosion and Sediment Control Final Inspection Form.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7a.dot|No. V-7a|Excellence in Construction information document.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-7b.xlt|No. V-7b|Excellence in Construction evaluation form (Attachment &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;).}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[media:As-built_plan_procedure_flow_chart.xlt‎|&#039;&#039;&#039;As-Built Plan Procedure Flow Chart&#039;&#039;&#039;]] is to be followed once construction activities begin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
KDOT can perform construction audits on City Administered Projects at any time. See [[media:KDOT_Construction_Oversight_Questionnaire.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT Construction Oversight Questionnaire&#039;&#039;&#039;]] for a list of items that will be of interest during an audit and shall be used in gathering information when preparing for an audit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 13 - On-Going Material Testing ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City will prepare and provide the selected Material Testing Laboratory with a Project Data Sheet for project coordination and communication. The guidelines for quality control/material testing will be performed using the guidelines as described/outlined in the Sampling and Testing Frequency Chart.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
All sampling will be performed at random locations in accordance with the [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/Connections/ConstManual/index.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT Construction Manual&#039;&#039;&#039;], Part V, Section 5.17.06.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
See [[media:IV-2f.dot|&#039;&#039;&#039;Exhibit No. IV-2f&#039;&#039;&#039;]] for the Material Sampling and Testing Frequency Chart.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-13b.dot|No. V-13b|is an example of a transmittal letter and the City&#039;s Project Data Sheet.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-13c.xlt|No. V-13c|is the City&#039;s Material Testing Log Sheet (excel format).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-13d.dot|No. V-13d|is the City&#039;s Material Testing Log Sheet (word format).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-13e.dot|No. V-13e|is the City&#039;s Material Testing Recap Log Sheet (word format).}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-13f.xlt|No. V-13f|is a spreadsheet used to calculate concrete unit weight based on supplier mix design and field test results.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 14 - On-Going Contractor Payments ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City pays Contractors and Consultants, if applicable, on a monthly basis. Ten percent is withheld from Contractor payments until the project is completed. The Consultant will be paid monthly based upon the terms of the agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager in consultation with the Project Inspector will prepare the Contractor’s monthly payments based upon work completed by the 25th day of the month. Payments will be forwarded to the Contract Specialist for further handling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Consultant payments are necessary, the Consultant shall invoice the City according to the terms of the agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All invoices shall be directed to the Project Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On KDOT projects, reimbursement vouchers must be submitted to the KDOT Project Development Engineer&#039;s Office on a monthly basis for processing through the CMS System.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
Current contact is:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Project Development Engineer - Bureau of Local Projects&lt;br /&gt;
:Kansas Department of Transportation&lt;br /&gt;
:Dwight D. Eisenhower State Office Building, 10th Floor&lt;br /&gt;
:700 S.W. Harrison Street&lt;br /&gt;
:Topeka, KS 66603-3754&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appropriate documentation must be provided to justify the payment. Documentation will be copy of the invoice, the pay estimate and the check to the Contractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-14a Pay estimate with DBE.xlsx|No. V-14a|is a template with instructions for creating a Monthly Pay Estimate.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|Each month that a DBE subcontractor works, the City must receive a &amp;quot;DBE Payment Affidavit&amp;quot; and a &amp;quot;Certificate of Subcontract Work and Payment&amp;quot;.   These documents are to ensure payment in full was made by the prime contractor to the DBE subcontractor within 10 days of payment to the prime contractor.  The &amp;quot;DBE Payment Affidavit&amp;quot; is to be completed by the DBE subcontractor.  The &amp;quot;Certificate of Subcontract Work and Payment&amp;quot; is to be completed by the prime contractor.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The DBE Subcontractor Payment Affidevit is generated within the monthly pay estimate template. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-14b.pdf|No. V-14b|is an example of the DBE Payment Affidavit.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-14c.xls|No. V-14c|is the Certificate of Subcontract Work and Payment.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|On all KDOT projects, the Project Manager in conjunction with the Project Inspector shall conduct Wage Rate Interviews and complete KDOT [[Media:V-14d.dot|&#039;&#039;&#039;Form No. 209&#039;&#039;&#039;]].}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 15 - On-Going Change Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare a change order to construct additional items of work, modify the contract time, or change the character and scope of the work. Each change order shall include a change to the contract time, or indicate that no change in the contract time is included. The change order shall be signed by the contractor prior to execution by the City. Refer to [[media:COP247.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;COP 247&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A final change order shall be prepared at the end of each project indicating final quantities (overruns and underruns).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT&#039;&#039;&#039; projects, see [[media:V-15.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;Exhibit No. V-15&#039;&#039;&#039;]] which summarizes the procedure for processing construction change orders.  All change orders shall be forwarded to KDOT’s Project Development Engineer in charge of the project, prior to execution by the City.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Often changes occur during construction of a project that require adjusting the compensation paid to a contractor. All changes must be within the scope and limits of the project. All change orders require prior approval from the Local Construction Manager. All changes require approval/concurrence by BLP prior to any of the work being completed. KDOT will provide email concurrence on all changes within 3 business days. If the City does not receive prior approval, the items on that change order may be deemed non-participating, as per &#039;&#039;&#039;23CFR635&#039;&#039;&#039;. KDOT&#039;s role to provide general administrative oversight and to determine the amount of federal participation. All change orders shalll be submitted to BLP for entry into Construction Management System (CMS).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change orders will be submitted using the unit prices from the original bid tabs when possible. If unit prices for the work area aren&#039;t included in the original paid items list, the City and the Contractor will negotiate a price. The City will conduct a cost analysis and submit the proposal from the contractor as backup documentation to BLP. If line items are deleted or zeroed out by change order, they must be listed at the buttom of the pay estimate in the change order section as negative amounts. Line items shall never be completely removed from the original bid tabs/paid items list. When changing an existing item, the existing unit price must be used. See an example of the [http://www.ksdot.org/burlocalproj/default.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;Final Paid Items List (FPIL)&#039;&#039;&#039;].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-participating items shall be clearly marked on the original bid tabs, plans, pay estimates and change orders. Email correspondence regarding the prior approval and determination of federal participation of the change order items between the City and KDOT shall be submitted as backup documentation with change orders. Once the determination of participation has been made, the items will be marked on the pay estimates if non-participating.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When following these procedures, reimbursement of funds shall be accomplished on a monthly basis when the city submits a proper billing certification that the project is being constructed within compliance of approved plans and specifications. Billing shall be by CMS work phases which include Preliminary Engineering (PE), Right of Way (ROW), Utilities, Construction Engineering (CE) and Construction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City will conduct a cost analysis of all changes to the contract included in the change order request in accordance with the Contract General Conditions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving Federal Aid for inspection, the City will submit requests for reimbursement to the Local Construction Manager with proper documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;&#039;CARS&#039;&#039;&#039; projects, the City must receive written approval of Johnson County for change orders and project scope modifications if CARS program participation is anticipated in the change order cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-15a.dot|No. V-15a|is a blank change order form. (Word Format)}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-15b.xlt|No. V-15b|is a blank change order form. (Excel Format)}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-15c.dot|No. V-15c|is a sample completed change order form.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-15d.dot|No. V-15d|is a sample change order transmittal letter.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 16 - On-Going Construction Administration ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall be responsible for Construction Administration. These duties shall include, but not be limited to the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Visit the Construction site weekly when construction activity is occurring. &lt;br /&gt;
*Hold regular progress meetings. &lt;br /&gt;
*Prepare/approve monthly Contractor/Consultant pay estimates as well as change orders. &lt;br /&gt;
*For KDOT projects, submit all required information, paper work and forms to the BLP&#039;s Project Development Engineer. &lt;br /&gt;
:For additional information {{LPA citation|15.4.3.4.6|[[Media:15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures 10-2011.pdf|&#039;&#039;&#039;15.0 LPA-Administered Procedures &#039;&#039;&#039;]]}}.&lt;br /&gt;
*For CARS and SMAC projects, complete project status reports at the request of the Johnson County Director of Infrastructure. &lt;br /&gt;
*Update Project Journal in the Project Database. &lt;br /&gt;
*Receive telephone inquires and respond accordingly. &lt;br /&gt;
*Handle project correspondence. &lt;br /&gt;
*Prepare/approve payment for material testing. &lt;br /&gt;
*Approve partial acceptance for certain work items, i.e. streetlights and traffic signals. &lt;br /&gt;
*Conduct final inspection. &lt;br /&gt;
*Approve final Contractor/Consultant payment. &lt;br /&gt;
*Submit annual staff billing reports to the Finance Department for projects which staff time is reimbursable. This also includes Improvement Districts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-16a.dot|No. V-16a|is a sample progress meeting agenda.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-16b.dot|No. V-16b|is a sample progress meeting minutes.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-16c.pdf|No. V-16c|is a sample of a Staff Billing Report to finance.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Note|The City will accept certain project work items prior to final project acceptance. As an example, streetlights that have been burning for the required contract time period.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 17 - Complete Final Inspection and Prepare a Punch List ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall schedule a final inspection when the project is complete and the Contractor/City inspector concurs that a final inspection is appropriate. The inspection party shall be the members of the City Design Team, the Consultant/Project Manager, Contractor/Sub-Contractors representatives and all other funding sources representative such as KDOT, CARS and SMAC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a result of this inspection, a “Punch List” will be prepared by the Consultant/Project Manager and forwarded to the Contractor.  All items on the &amp;quot;Punch List&amp;quot; are to be addressed by the Contractor before final payment is approved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the project is complete except for sod/seeding due to season restrictions, the Contractor will be advised of the next time period when this work will be completed. An amount of money to perform this work shall be held from the Contractor until this work is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-17.dot|No. V-17|is a sample “Punch List” for the Contractor to complete.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 18 - Notify Permitting Agencies ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Project Manager shall notify all permitting agencies when the project is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-18a.dot|No. V-18a|is a sample Notice of Termination letter for Stormwater Runoff from Construction Activities.}}&lt;br /&gt;
:[http://www.kdheks.gov/stormwater/download/Notice_of_Termination.pdf &#039;&#039;&#039;Exhibit No. V-18b&#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039; is a link to KDHE&#039;s Notice of Termination form.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-18c.dot|No. V-18c|is a sample KDOT Highway Permit release letter.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-18d.pdf|No. V-18d|is an example of a transmittal letter with Notice of Termination enclosed.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 19 - Prepare Revisions/As-Built Plans ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare revision/as-built plans subsequent to final inspection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See: [[media:As-built plan procedure flow chart August 2012).xlsx|&#039;&#039;&#039;As-Built Plan Procedure Flow Chart.&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 20 - Send Letter to Owners Regarding Sod Care, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Project Manager, subsequent to the final inspection of the sod, will provide all property owners a letter explaining that the project has been completed. The primary message is to convey to the property owners that the sod/seed and tree care (watering and fertilizing) is now the property owners responsibility. The letter should suggest guidelines for taking care of the sod/seed and trees. Project Manager / Inspector may consider taking photos of the sod to document the condition at the time when letter is sent out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-20a.dot|No. V-20a|is a sample letter to property owners regarding sod/seed care.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-20b.dot|No. V-20b|is a sample letter to property owners regarding tree care.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 21 - Receive Contractor Project Completion Certification ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Contract Specialist is responsible for obtaining one signed copy of the &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Project Completion Certification&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; from the Contractor.  To discontinue the Contractor’s Tax Exemption number, the Contract Specialist will enter the actual project completion date on the Kansas Department of Revenue’s website at: &#039;&#039;&#039;https://www.kdor.org/TaxCenter&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-21a Sample Letter with Project Completion Certificate.docx|No. V-21a|is a sample transmittal letter to the Contractor.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-21b KS Project Completion Certification.pdf|No. V-21b|is a State of Kansas Project Completion Certification.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 22 - Project Completion Certification &amp;amp; Scheduling of the Final Inspection Prior to Expiration of 2 Year Maintenance Bond ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall execute a &amp;quot;Certificate of Engineer as to Completion&amp;quot;. This shall not be signed until all “Punch List” items have been completed and acknowledged by the Project Inspector. For CARS projects, the City will submit certification of project acceptance to Johnson County within thirty days of project completion.&lt;br /&gt;
See [[media:ESC_PW_Process.doc|&#039;&#039;&#039;Land Disturbance Permit Process&#039;&#039;&#039;]] as it pertains to the final inspection with the Erosion and Sediment Control Field Reviewer and close out of the LDP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-22a.dot|No. V-22a|is a sample “Certificate of Engineer as to Completion” form.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare a final inspection letter stating when the maintenance period for the 2 Year Maintenance Bond will begin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-22b.dot|No. V-22b|is a sample final inspection letter.}}&lt;br /&gt;
The final inspection letter is to be copied to the following people for inventory updates:&lt;br /&gt;
*Contract Specialist:  For scheduling end of 2 year Maintenance Bond meeting.&lt;br /&gt;
*Engineering Technician:  Street network inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
*Engineering Technician:  Storm Sewer inventory and Bar Grate inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
*Engineering Technician:  Snow map updates, Sidewalk inventory, Street Light Projects and Traffic Signal Projects.&lt;br /&gt;
*PW MG&lt;br /&gt;
*Public Works Maintenance Supervisors&lt;br /&gt;
*Bridge Inventory Coordinator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Contract Specialist will schedule the final inspection prior to expiration of 2 year Maintenance Bond following the steps below:   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Request the date to be used for the end of the 2 year Maintenance Bond period and the employees to be included in the final inspections from the Project Manager. &lt;br /&gt;
*Schedule a meeting using Outlook for 2 months prior to the expiration of the 2 year Maintenance Bond to give involved employees time to make a final inspection prior to expiration of the bond. &lt;br /&gt;
*This meeting will be scheduled in Outlook under Public Folders - All Public Folders - Public Works - Public Works Projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 23 - Submit Notice of Acceptance to KDOT ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Contractor has completed all the “Punch List” items the City will be responsible for acceptance of the completed work, as specified in Section 105.17 of [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/specprov/specifications.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT Standard Specifications&#039;&#039;&#039;]. The City will use City &#039;&#039;&#039;Form V-2398&#039;&#039;&#039; to document Notice of Acceptance from the Contractor.  The City will submit a DBE Summary Report stating amount paid and work performed by DBE contractor(s) and final breakdown of construction costs by work type.&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-23.dot|No. V-23|is a transmittal letter to KDOT regarding completion of project.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-23a.dot|No. V-23a|is a copy of the Notice to Acceptance, City Form V-2398.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-23b.pdf|No. V-23b|is a copy of KDOT form 270 Final DBE Payment Affidavit. This form is to be completed by the Contractor and returned to the City. The City will utilize form 270 during the preparation of the DBE Summary Report shown below.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-23c.dot|No. V-23c|is a copy of the DBE Summary Report to be completed by the City and submitted to KDOT.}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-23d.xlt|No. V-23d|is a sample Final Breakdown of Construction Cost by Work Type.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 24 - Submit Material Certification to KDOT ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City is responsible for material certifications as documented in Section 2.07 of [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/Connections/ConstManual/index.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT’s Construction Manual&#039;&#039;&#039;] and Section 2600 of [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/specprov/specifications.asp &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT’s Standard Specifications&#039;&#039;&#039;]. These certifications will verify the Contractor has furnished materials that meet specified requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Material Sampling, testing procedures and materials certification requirements must be followed on all Federal Aid projects. Testing Frequency charts are available on the KDOT website. Materials testiing personnel must be properly certified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Section 106 of 2007 eddition of [http://www.ksdot.org/burconsmain/specprov/2007/106.pdf &#039;&#039;&#039;KDOT&#039;s Standard Specifications&#039;&#039;&#039;], or latest revision,  for information on QC/QA or Verification testing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Materials testing personnel performing materials tests on Federal Aid projects must be witnessed by KDOT Materials. Mass witnessing events take place in each District on yearly basis. Most consultants already participate. It is the City&#039;s responsibility to contact the local KDOT construction office to inquire about mass witnessing events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 25 - Submit Construction Summary Document to KDOT ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City shall be responsible for submitting the Construction Summary Document to KDOT once the project has been accepted from the Contractor. This document will certify that the activities in the Construction Phase have been completed in accordance with Federal and State laws and regulations as well as KDOT&#039;s Construction Manual. This documents will include a final statement that the contractor has provided appropriate materials certification for the project. A FLIP with a breakout of costs by work type (i.e. Common Items, Roadway, Bridge, Traffic Signals) shall be submitted to BLP at this time. This breakdown is similar to the Bid Items List submitted with the Letting Summary Document except it should reflect the actual costs of construction, including all change orders with all non-participating items marked as such. The FLIP will need to be excel and formula-driven, not hard-keyed, in total column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Construction Summary Document shall be sent to the Project Development Engineer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-25.docx|No. V-25| is a copy of the Construction Summary Document form}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 26 - Receive Final Acceptance from KDOT ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The City will be responsible for acceptance of the project for all contracts for completion of the plan requirements and material certification. This will be documented on City Form V-2698. The City shall complete a “Final Statement of Cost” for submittal to BLP in excel format. At this time a final breadown costs by work type (i.e. roadway, surfacing, bridges, traffic signals and common items) shall be provided to KDOT, with participating and non-participating items clearly separated. Both the final statement of cost and the breakdown by work type should include all costs associated with the project regardless of funding source with non-participating items marked as such. The City shall notify the local Construction Manager when the Notice of Acceptance is issued and the LCM shall perform a walkthrough of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-26.dot|No. V-26| is a copy of the Final Acceptance of Federal Aid Project, City Form V-2698}}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 27 - Approve Consultant Final Pay ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subsequent to completing all required Consultant duties and responsibilities, the final pay will be submitted for payment in accordance with the Consultant Agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Task No. 28 - Approve Contractor Final Pay and Surety Release ==&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Consultant/Project Manager in conjunction with the Contract Specialist will prepare the Contractor’s final pay and the final change order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following will accompany this final pay document to the Finance Department:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Consent of Surety to Final Payment, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contractor Project Completion Certification (see [[Phase_V_-_Construction#Task_No._21_-_Receive_Contractor_Project_Completion_Certification|&#039;&#039;&#039;Phase V, Task 21&#039;&#039;&#039;]]), and &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certificate of Engineer as to Completion (see [[Phase_V_-_Construction#Task_No._22_-_Project_Completion_Certification_.26_Scheduling_of_the_Final_Inspection_Prior_to_expiration_of_2_Year_Maintenance_Bond|&#039;&#039;&#039;Phase V, Task 22&#039;&#039;&#039;]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Exhibit|V-28.pdf|No. V-28| is a sample transmittal letter with final Change Order/Explanation, Final Contractor Pay Estimate, Certificate of Engineer as to Completion and Surety Release}}.&lt;br /&gt;
== [[:Category:Phase V Exhibits|All Phase V Exhibits]] ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>